Home
        0 - Pontiac
         Contents
1.                        4 2  Fus Ceanna relies FOL ETAGE WE EAR 6 41         Equipment  Adding            2 16  3 18  6 48 Filling Your Tank        EIE                        ee   6 7  Electronic Climate Control 1    llo eere 3 4 Filter                     leis ace asd disse    EL rro 1 4                                           ae      6 16  Minua  MB eei ess vero        opi pns 3 5 Engine Oil               clu  EY Sae Aud Fart ent 6 15  Electronic Compass 5 2 2224 dead lie ee ee ca    2 68 Finish Cate                            6 44  Engine Accessory Belt    ene eee rr n nn 6 11 Binet Dimana             pz auam la               6 45  Engine Accessory Belt  Mpeg id dies nw ale    6 12 First Gear  Automatic Transaxle          222   Pon De cuore winch wees fears a      eas 6 22 Fixed Mast Antenna                   vii e ras   deg  Adding         PIER          ye RR ROI SEE P EIER 6 23 Flashers  Hazard Warning               ern 5 1               veces exercere m                          6 23 Fiar Tire                                    Engine Coolant Heater     os oie eee         2 17  6 15 Fog Lamp Bulb Replacement                      6 32  Engine Coolant Temperature Gage                   2 56 POS                                pe ie een eed 2 34               Foreign Counties  Fuel      eol dos pees ews 6 6  French Language Manual    ccc ccc ae ese ered nh i  Front Towing Hookups  Except SSE                   Bes    Front Towing Hookups  SSE Orly                    3 10  Fu
2.                     2 18    Shifting  Performante oo    eee hmmm 2 22  Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster      eese 1 11  Signaling TIME                                          raa qvis 2 3   Skiddihg                                          4 13  Sound Equipment  Adding 2    aas 3 18  Spare Tire  Compact   2    ies             3 32  SpesdcunMPI       ok hoe tee CRY S    E xe mn CR ERROR 2 50  Stans  Cleaning oe ce cece ee ee ees se eee            Standard Climate Control oo    resa eee 3 2  alufer Bwileli aa kn eee CEREX TERT 7 38  Starting Taur Engine    iis            sens haa 2 13  Steam  If Coming From Your Engine A E EEE er arg Stic ora  14         E rire cuu EP FEA EXC XO aue               WT FR 4 9  steering Column Lock              sen ese esses AUAM  Steering Column Shift Lever           cessed eee 2 24  Steering Wheel Touch Controls  Audio ee yon 3 17       Wheel THE cierre      rrr             2 30  Steering  In Emergencies 5    eccna daia haaa aiaa 4 10   OTN OWA Ur DIL ume EKEERMCENE AA        4 9  SIEHE TTL                          cix s E ree e A A          4 9  Steering  Variable Blfort 2         cern ae eee ens 4 9  Storage Armrest       WE rina rye ene care ATHEN 2 45  Storage  Of Your Vellei                         Storage  Rear Compartment      iios enn 2 46  Storage  Sunglasses             aen exer eed 2 44  c GTS RICE NOIRE TERT ECCE LI ee EK OR        2 44  Sunglasses SUOTARE               a dade a d Rad 2 44  Sunroof  Express Open                    APER 
3.                   4 35 Engine Identification            a ae ae wp eae eae 6 48  Driving TERME CMD            TUE IE wee EY SUM M Perro 6      6 12                 CET ANE VR ara as dora EET ER 4 14          C E ECCE rH                    6 13  KD ais AT           er PL ie                  cone    WIE NEA                                    FECE a 6 15  Lien Lc ccce eee eaa ka        Poe eee abe      Tels hr ura Les terea EE EE 6 13  Drunken       PEUT VIERSEN EU D ET                 Wit Kind to    eae                   nea 6 14  FREU            rockin Ore Sp I S eru ctp 4 20 What to do with Used Oil                        6 16  lia          lr 12s  zl veo ds arr rasis Mal When do Chatga              ee Ren eens 6 15  In          COUIBIER   eer nece cens Engine Overhenting                reo rios 5 12  bt the        10S seek        EARN Ai meta      E ER 4 16 Engine  Running It While You re Parked              2 28  Unt GUSE             4 9                                 2 15  On Hill and Mountain Reads                     4 22 Engine  Supercharged       ee cede ss            Snow and      ce e nnn EE I E    4 25 Edo         m rir            t e RE  Through Deep Standing           2 17 Er hinsti          u c ee rure ETE ca cacao      a                           84 D                   4 24 Expectant Mothers  Use of Safety Beli       1 22  MEDIE SCPRTEY  oie eaaieae thea ees cen sa E Peu erre 4 34 Exvietder  Safety        oo rossa autre ana Rr es 1 42  Drinken                  
4.                  2 46  Rear Window Defogger                                FS  Rear Window Defogger  Electronic Climate Control      4 6  Rearview Mirror                                        du are           2 41  inene Miama        vom aec a 2 4   Reclining Front Seatbacks      04   600 4004 evens    1 3  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants                7 4              keyless DIY joey ede                         2 5  Battery Replacement           275  Matching Transmitters        2 6                    E DURER          EV 2 6  Remote Trunk Release            2 12  Replacement Bulbs                 6 53  Replacement Parts          RH ER d        OUR GU CREE  Replpceihent                       tranne 6 38  Replacing Safety Belts       eias hano 1 42  Replacing Seat and Restraint System Parts After    Crash 1 42  Restraints  Checking Your             ess esses ens 1 42  RESO COAT EU S epe psa ERO el npa    n        1 31  Restraints  Hemi                      aaa    lu  Restraints  Replacing Parts After    Crash              1 42  Retained Accessory Power                         s               PORTIO Lu rural ba e DICE SER AER OT AER 2 19    9 8    Right Front Passenger Position                                     Hight Fuse Panel         n ele          6 52  Roadside Assistance    scusa rn ram ces 8 6  Roadside Assistance  Canadian                       8 7  Rocking Your Vehicle            9 33         9                              6 35  Safety Belt                       
5.                the dipstick back in all the way  dipstick and wipe it posten oem alio    With OAE             How to Add Fluid   paper towel     Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  kind of transaxle fluid to use  See  Recommended  Fluids and Lubricants  in the Index     2  Push it back in all  the way  wait three  seconds and then      pull it back out If the fluid level is low  add only enough of the proper fluid  again  to bring the level into the cross hatched area on the dipstick     1  Pull out the dipstick        2  Using a long neck funnel  add enough fluid at the  dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level  It doesn   t  take much fluid  generally less than a pint  0 5L    Don t overfill  We recommend you use only fluid  labeled DEXRON      because fluid with that label  is made especially for your automatic transaxle   Damage caused by fluid other        DEXRON   1I  is not covered by your new vehicle warranty        After adding fluid  recheck the fluid level as       ADD   pT OR 5L 2555 b described under    How to Check        When the correct fluid level is obtained  push the  dipstick back in all the way             6 21    Engine Coolant    The following explains your cooling system and how to  add coolant when it is low  If you have a problem with  engine overheating  see  Engine Overheating  in the  Index     The proper coolant for your Pontiac will    Give freezing protection down to  34  F   37  C    Give boiling protection up to 262 F  1
6.               NENNT  Safety Belt Reminder Light                     1 5  2 32  SPR HER                 1 5  BOUE eor conne por vir MIDI US EDS 1 9                         CC dowd eR aida EIS eI Rea La  Ord  Center Passenger                                      1 23                                                                               adea aod E XO EE SOR WWE    1 10  CXII rep bag Ana mls ati n                 1 42  How to Wear Properly          1 9  Incorrect Usage          PE E 1 12  1 40  1 41            renier                                     1 23  Lap Shodlder               n sh rares 1 10  1 24  Questions People Ask                  TE 1 9  Rear Comfort Guides                       Sateen 1 27  Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions               1 24  Rear Seat Passengets 2 2 2 00 ccc          1 24  Replacing After a Crash                      5  1 42  Right Front Passenger Position                  4 1 22  Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster                            Use by CEHO                                      1 29  Use by Larger Children    ace nnn 1 39  Use hy Smaller Children and Babies                 1 29  Use During Pregnancy 6 5 eae seine 520  WY CHE          a eee    er rece eae n  s                Safety  Chains      ce cates es reete               4   Safety Defects    p  ud    Reporting to General Motors            1         8 5   Reporting to the Canadian Government             5 3   Reporting      the United States Government           8 4  Safet
7.              6 44  aperia PRODIRE onan bree ree miht re o 6 4   SHAN   iio te ea eae haces xl zu Sewers tary  aaa 6 4                                                6 45  Top of the Instrument Panel                        6742  MESI C teary reg a es sale a             cM m          6 42  Windshield and Wiper Blades                     6 43  Climate Control  Standard Pap i a avra irc ia efc eS A RO    3 2  Clock  Setting             TET EUN  3 7  Comfort Controls 2 5             VEI E EE Ee 3    CONTROL EAD ION LLL LL apneic ELERA 3 20  Compsct Spare Tite  sa ee casas kun        5 32  Compass  Electronic         PPS ELCHE               2 68  Computer Command Ride    0 05 illl riu  2 22  Console Shift Lever           CRESCE X OFTEN I ET 2 25  Conmol of                                4 4                                       TREE EE           4 13  Convenience Net          i eee cde                 2 43  Convex Outside             PEG E E ee                ate rege    Asti m E PA  REA ATA  ie 6 22  Coolant Hester  Brgine     0  een 2 17  6 15  Coclant  Recovery Tink                     err RR 5 5 15    Coolant  How te Add to the Coolant Recovery Tank     5 15    Coolant  How to Add to the Radiator                    17  CHOPPER T EIER      Wer pr T de 9 13  Lee COE                        2 24   Erasing Speed Memory   T ETIN Tri Eaque 2 31   Getting Qutof                  Sera SUE oca a  2 37                                                         CERO   Passing Another Vehicle W
8.         There are several ways to    lock and unlock your  vehicle     From the outside     Use your door key or Remote Keyless Entry  if your  vehicle has this option   If you have the Theft Deterrent System  you will also    unlock and lock all doors when you unlock or lock  cither front door with you key     From the inside  Power Door Locks            lock the door  slide the locking lever rearward    To unlock the door  slide the locking lever Forward        With power door locks  you can lock or unlock all the  doors of your vehicle from the driver or front passenger  door lock switch     The switch on each rear door works only that door s  lock  It won t lock  or unlock  all of the doors    that s a  safety feature        Leaving Your Vehicle    If you are leaving the vehicle  take your keys  open your  door and set the locks from inside  Then get out and  close the door     If your vehicle has the theft deterrent option  see   Theft Deterrent System  later in this section     Remote Keyless Entry  Option     If your Pontiac has this option  you can lock and unlock your  doors or unlock your trunk from up to 30 feet  9 m  away  using the key chain transmitter supplied with your vehicle           Your Remote Keyless Entry System operates on    radio  frequency subject to Federal Communications  Commission  FCC  Rules     This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules   Operation is subject to the following two conditions   1   This device may not cause harmful inter
9.        2 49    Speedometer and Odometer    Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles  per hour  mph  and kilometers per hour  km h   Your  odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven   in either miles  used in the United States  or kilometers   used in Canada      The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the  Driver Information Center on vehicles so equipped     Tamper Resistant Odometer    Your Pontiac has a tamper resistant odometer  If you see    silver lines between the numbers  you ll know that  someone has probably tried to turn it back  so the  numbers may not be true     You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a  new odometer installed  If the new one can be set to the    mileage total of the old odometer  then it must be  But if    it can t  then it s set at zero and a label must be put on  the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when  the new odometer was installed     2 50          Trip Odometer               MI NMITOR    Ea E  iA             TRIP         ef    LOW COOLANT         DOOR   BACK UP  AJAR f      yh BRAKE LAMP  MILES  1                   The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven   since you last reset it  To set it to zero       On vehicles with the Driver Information Center   press the button labeled TRIP        On vehicles with the Systems Monitor  the button is  next to the trip odometer  Push and release in a  smooth  continuous motion until all zeroes appear        Tachometer  Option     
10.       Maintenance Schedule H       67 500 Miles  112 500 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service         Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first     1 Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY     75 000 Miles  125 000 km      _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first      ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 33    Maintenance Schedule          82 500 Miles  137 500 km     1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service    C Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first         Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     ACTUAL MILEAGE       qup             SERVICED BY     90 000 Miles  150 000 km        Change e
11.     8 2           Sov           ene pie IU aie rain EET EI 3 3  High Beam Lights  How to Change                   2 35  Highway Hypnosis         4    42 2 ee 00  e0 esses     4 22  Hill and Mountain Roads                                  Heo IO                           ne Ce 4 33  Hood          Message    eleccion n nns 2 67  Hood Release        EU E RU EE      ATI ES tet die 6 U  Harn                 trc esi e eL  2 30                                                         4 18     r You re Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow           5 33                          a a a visura een          m e ICE Re en 2  4  Illuminated Entry System    0 20    ee 2 12  Infiaror ATE               emen MES TITEL DI       Inside Manual Rearview Mirror                22    24   Inspections                esa 9 024529 hee           FEAT TS        7 41  Exhaust Systems jaa d          eae ees 7 41  Restat a recor mtt tmm 7 40  5icering  Suspension  Axle Boot and Seal       pee 71 40          LINKES oues seram aceto ant   1 41   Instrument Panel 1 11 2 2l lile qaae ka 2 49  Instrument Panel Clusters                   oor    0  Instrument Panel Intensity Control                     2 39  Instrument Panel  Cleaning              esee   6 42    Ada ie VU IEEE           PET 5 23    Jump Stn ocio peed tee bale      EE ie  Key Lock Cylinders eee 7 38  17 1                               IEE        O alae 2    Tomo Contuli  crecer rers TT 2 37  Lamp Monitor Message                       4    2 67  Lamp  DO 
12.     lever to lack the seatback      place     CAUTION     Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is  in motion can he dangerous  Even if you buckle  up  vour safety belts can t do their job when  you re reclined like this    The shoulder belt can t do its job because it  won t be against your body  Instead  it will be in    front of vou  In a crash you could go into it   receiving neck or other injuries    The lap belt can t do its job either  In a crash the  helt could go up over your abdomen  The belt  forces would be there  not at your pelvic bones   This could cause serious internal injuries        For proper protection when the vehicle is in  But don t have    seatback reclined if your vehicle is motion  have the seatback upright  Then sit well  moving  back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly        Head Restraints   Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the  restraint is closest to the top of your ears  This position  reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash    On some models  the head restraints tilt forward and  rearward also                                                                                       Safety Belts  They re for Everyone    This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts  properly  It also tells you some things you should not do  with safety belts     And it explains the Supplemental Inflatahle Restraint  or     air hag  system        CAUTION    Don t let anyone ride where he or she can t w
13.    4 20           Once you are moving on the freeway  make certain you  allow a reasonable following distance  Expect to move  slightly slower at night     When you want to leave the freeway  move to the proper  lane well in advance  If you miss your exit do not  under  any circumstances  stop and back up  Drive on to the  next exit     The exit ramp can be curved  sometimes quite sharply   The exit speed is usually posted     Reduce your speed according to your speedometer  not  to your sense of motion  After driving for any distance  at higher speeds  you may tend to think you are going  slower than you actually are     Before Leaving on a Long Trip    Make sure you re ready  Try to be well rested  If you  must start when you re not fresh    such as after a day s  work    don t plan to make too many miles that first part  of the journey  Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you  can easily drive in     Is your vehicle ready for a long trip  If you keep it  serviced and maintained  it s ready to go  If it needs  service  have it done before starting out  Of course   you ll find experienced and able service experts in    Pontiac dealerships all across North America  They ll be   ready and willing to help if you need it    Here are some things you can check before a trip    e Windshield Washer Fluid  Is the reservoir full  Are  all windows clean inside and outside   Wiper Blades  Are they in good shape   Fuel  Engine Oil  Other Fluids  Have you checked  all levels   Lamps  Are 
14.    PROTECT  EYES BY  SHIELDING  FASTEN  SEAT    CAUSTIC BELTS    BATTERY  ACID COULD w  CAUSE    BURNS    AVOID  SPARKS OF  FLAMES    SPARK OR  FLAME  COULD   EXPLODE    WARNING  FLASHER    RII    E        VENTILATING  LAMPS         FAN  HIGH BEAM         These symbols  are used on    warning and  indicator lights     ENGINE  gir    E     BATTERY    CHARGING      SYSTEM    owe        RADIATOR   COOLANT           8     ENGINE OIL  PRESSURE    ENGINE        TEMP    ANTI LOCK  sake  fus     Here are some  other symbols  VOR miy SCC     Fuse          neLease esp    J  coment X X    TRUNK  RELEASE    RADIO  VOLUME    P    LIGHTER O    a        NOTES    vi    Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems    Here you ll find information about the seats in your  Pontiac and how to use your safety belts properly  You  can also learn about some things you should nor do with  air bags and safety belts     Seats and Seat Controls    This section tells you about the seats    how to adjust them     and also about reclining seatbacks and head restraints     Manual Front Seat    AN CAUTION     You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to   adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is Pull up on the control bar under the front of the seat to  moving  The sudden movement could startle and unlock it  Slide the seat to where you want it  Then  confuse you  or make you push a pedal when you release the bar and try to move the seat with your body   don t want to  Adjust the driver s seat only w
15.    The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions  per minute  rpm   Do not run your engine at speeds in  the red area     Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators    Warning lights and gages can signal that something is  wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an  expensive repair or replacement  Paying attention to  your warning lights and gages could also save you or  others from injury     Warning lights come on when there may be or is a  problem with one of your vehicle   s functions  As you  will see in the details on the next few pages  some  warning lights come on briefly when you start the  engine just to let you know they re working  If you are  familiar with this section  you should not be alarmed  when this happens     Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem  with one of your vehicle s functions  Often gages and  warning lights work together to let you know when  there   s a problem with your vehicle     When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on  when you are driving  or when one of the gages shows  there may be a problem  check the section that tells you  what to do about it  Please follow this manual s advice   Waiting to do repairs can be costly    and even  dangerous  5o please get to know your warning lights  and gages  They re    big help                     Q       M       M                Safety Belt Reminder Light       When the key is turned to RUN or START  a chime will  come on for about eight seconds to remind people
16.   Check                      asse Lara      2 67  Check Gages Warning Light                       2 64  Check Cil Level Message               2 67  Check Oil Level Warning Light                      2 60  Checking Your Restraint Systems                     1 42  Checking  Automatic Transaxle Fluid                       6 20         PO 5 elas barely dA TORTE GIN      d 6 21  Engine Coolant                         MA ET aren 6 23       al       OE rre rea EH Sad cS E KA RS ARR oP 6 13  lire mti  06 MER i   Power Steering Fluid    voies 6 23  METH EHE sores              1 42  Things Under the Hood                                Chemical Paint Spotting        EE Se CHEER A 6 46  Child Resirg ik 222 diseases cee ER Ee Lk eA 1 31  Securing in    Rear Outside Seat Position            1 33  Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position           1 35  Securing in the Right Front Seat Position            1 37   dus MN         ICPrCEPER NIB QR M reis 1 22              Lire VER Y                        1 31    TUA MM EE       Cigarette Lighter    eri ees                            2 47           Breakers                 49  Cleaner                             CT                arbol ote        6 16  Cleaning         Wheels asso eae dass 6 45         2 12                UR UU 6 4   Cabins ae tise eae TX                                              Inside of Your Pontiac _          FPES UTERE d NE 6 40             actrees seen                T 6 42  Outside of Your Pontiac         els        
17.   Power Mast Care                   wae 3 20   Automatic Transaxle Fluid         Eel PIPER i oro uar edm rte     E   4 6  Brake Fluid             s  ius M RU 6 28 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light        od 254  4 6  Electrical Equipment                 25 16  3 18  6 48 Ante ock Brakes  ee ena cs et ee ee              Coolant                                                        Anti Theft Feature  THEFTLOCK                    3 14  Engine Mil    CHA                     TERES AUD TEE Lr Li Le MV uTiRekrdn ed du sd RN CE  Power Steering Fluid                          Adding NP Sone GR nee               6 23  Sound Equipment                        Checking Ur      RE CS Terenti 6 23  Supercharger Oil                   cod i  Appearance           ee                 e 1   Windshie ld Washer Fluid Ke d FA eet D  a ad E 6 26 Appearance Care and Mater ials Nen es ae Mp E AA     47  Adjustable Support Seat          be Armrest  Storage    45  Air Bag       TIE                       vada veda    E ER ERA ERA 78 47  How Does it Restrain oT ER xm       1 30  Audia System  Steering    heel Touch Controls 1 17  How Work pga bite ree ee hea die ded roa ua 1 18 Audio Systems          3 7  Location                 FE ati tame t ites be D Automatic Overdrive Position T RE m 2 2    Servicing               AI e PLN           ETAT P ES    Automa  uc Rearview Mirror             2 li ll ll  2 4    What Makes it Infl  iie   1 19 Automatic Transaxle                       2 18  What Will You See 
18.   Vehicle identification number    Vehicle license plate number    Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or  reimbursement to an owner or driver when in Pontiac s  judgement the claims become obsessive in frequency or  type of occurrence     While we hope that you never have the occasion to use  our service  itis added security while travelling for you  und your family  Remember  we re only a phone call  away  Pontiac Roadside Assistance     I 800 ROADSIDE or 1 800 762 3743     Canadian Roadside Assistance    Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive  Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere  in Canada or the United States Please refer to the  separate brochure provided by the dealer or call  1 800 268 6800 for emergency services     Service and Owner Publications    Service manuals  service bulletins  owner s manuals and  other service literature are available for purchase for all  current and many past model General Motors vehicles     Toll free telephone numbers for ordering information     U  5  1 800 551 1123  Canada 1 800 668 5539       Service Manuals    Service manuals contain diagnosis and repair  information for all chassis and body systems  They may  be useful for owners who wish to get    greater  understanding of their vehicle  They are also useful far  owners with the appropriate skill level or training who  wish to perform    do it yourself    service  These are  authentic General Motors service manuals meant For  professional  qualified
19.   When it s Time for New Tires    One way to tell when it s   time for new tires is to   check the treadwear   indicators  which will   appear when your tires have      only 1 16 inch  1 6 mm  or    less of tread remaining        You need a new tire if        You can see the indicators at three or more places  around the tire        You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s  rubber         The tread or sidewall is cracked  cut or snagged deep  enough to show cord or fabric     The tire has a bump  bulge or split     The tire has a puncture  cut  or other damage that  can t be repaired well because of the size or location  of the damage     Buying New Tires    To find out what kind and size of tires you need  look at  the Tire Loading Information label     The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had  a Tire Performance Criteria Specification  TPC Spec   number on each tire   s sidewall  When you get new tires   get ones with that same TPC Spec number  That way   your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed  to give proper endurance  handling  speed rating   traction  ride and other things during normal service on  vour vehicle     vour tires have an all season tread  design  the TPC number will be followed by an    MS      for mud and snow      If you ever replace your tires with those not having a  TPC Spec number  make sure they are the same size   load range  speed rating and construction type  bias   bias belted or radial  as your orig
20.   linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first     C Inspect engine accessory drive belt  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first        Drain  flush and refill cooling system  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first    see  Engine Coolant  in the Index for what  to use  Inspect hoses  Clean radiator   condenser  pressure cap and neck  Pressure  test the cooling system and pressure cap   An Emission Control Service    C  Replace spark plugs  An Emission Control  Service                Inspect spark plug wires  An Emission  Control Service         Replace air cleaner filter  An Emission  Control Service    L  Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  damage  Replace parts as needed    An Emission Control Service  T    _  For supercharged engines only  Check the  supercharger oil level and add oil as needed   or every 36 months  whichever occurs  first   See  Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants    in this section  An Emission  Control Service       ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY     7 29         Maintenance Schedule       37 500 Miles  62 500         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   w
21.   remote positive     terminal if the vehicle has one     Now connect the black negative     cable to the good  battery s negative     terminal     Don t let the other end touch anything until the next  step  The other end of the negative cable doesnt go to  the dead battery  It goes to a heavy unpainted metal  part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery     10        Attach the cable at least 18 inches  45 cm  away  from the dead battery  but not near engine parts that  move  The electrical connection is just as good  there  but the chance of sparks getting back to the  battery is much less     Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run  the engine for    while       Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery  If it    won t start after    few tries  it probably needs  service                un  un    Towing Your Pontiac       12  Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent  electrical shorting  Take care that they don t touch  each other or any other metal  Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing service   tow your Pontiac  The usual towing equipment is      A  Sling type tow truck   B  Wheel lift     C  Car carrier       A                                                                 n                     If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it  was factory new by adding aftermarket items like fog  lamps  aero skirting  or special tires and wheels  these  instructions and illustrations may not be correct   Before you do a
22.   you may also want to  check the fuse  see    Fuses and Circuit Breakers  in the  Index   If the starter won t work with the other key  your  vehicle needs service  If vour vehicle does start  the first  ignition key may be faulty  See your Pontiac dealer or     locksmith who can service the PASS Key           If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged or  missing resistor pellet  the starter won t work and the  SECURITY light will flash  But you don t have to wait  three minutes before trying another ignition key     See your Pontiac dealer or a locksmith who can service  the PASS Key PII to have a new key made     If you re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes  on and remains on  you will be able to restart your  engine if you turn it off  Your       5        Il system   however  is not working properly and must be serviced  by your Pontiac dealer  Your vehicle is not protected by  the PASS  Key       system     If you lose or damage a PASS Key  Il ignition key  see  your Pontiac dealer or a locksmith who can service  PASS Key II to have a new key made  In an  emergency  call the Pontiac Roadside Assistance  Program at 1 800 ROADSIDE  or 1 800 762 3743                                                                     D      BI    Illuminated Entry System  Option     When you lift the lever of either front door  a lamp will  glow around the door lock  This will help you insert the  door key at night     The lamps inside your vehicle will also go on  These  lamp
23.  35 mph  56 km h  or  farther than 50 miles  80 km  or your transaxle will be  damaged  If these limits must be exceeded  then the  front wheels have to be supported on a dolly     E                           M M                              R EE EE                                                               M      A CAUTION     A vehicle can fall from    car carrier if it isn   t  adequately secured  This can cause a collision     serious personal injury and vehicle damage  The    vehicle should be tightly secured with chains or  steel cables before it is transported     Don t use substitutes  ropes  leather straps   canvas webbing  etc   that can be cut by sharp  edges underneath the towed vehicle  Always use  T hooks inserted in the T hook slots  Never use  J hooks  They will damage drivetrain and  suspension components        Front Towing Hookups  Except SSE     Before hooking up to a tow truck  be sure to read all the  information about    Towing Your Pontiac  earlier in this  section    Attach T hook chains into the bottom slots in the cradle  behind the front wheels  on both sides    Across sling chains  position a 4 x 4 wood beam against  the bottom of the radiator support behind the front  bumper     Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end  of each control arm           Front Towing Hookups  SSE Only     NOTICE     Do not tow with sling type equipment or  fascia fog lamp damage will occur  Towing a     vehicle over rough surfaces could damage a  vehi
24.  A broken  center line usually indicates it s all right to pass   providing the road ahead is clear   Never cross a solid  line on your side of the lane or a double solid line   even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic     4 12      Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass    while you re awaiting an opportunity  For one thing   following too closely reduces your area of vision   especially if you re following a larger vehicle  Also   you won t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead  suddenly slows or stops  Keep back a reasonable  distance     When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up   start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don t  get too close  Time your move so you will be  increasing speed as the time comes ta move into the  other lane  If the way is clear to pass  you will have      running start  that more than makes up for the  distance you would lose by dropping back  And if  something happens to cause you to cancel your pass   you need only slow down and drop back again and  wait for another opportunity     If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle  wait  your turn  But take care that someone isn t trying to  pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle   Remember to glance over your shoulder and check  the blind spot     Check your mirrors  glance over your shoulder  and  start your left lane change signal before moving out  of the right lane to pass  When you are far enough  ahead of the passed vehicle to se
25.  Control Service     _  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first         Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     SERVICED BY     ACTUAL MILEAGE       7 35       Maintenance Schedule I    100 000 Miles  166 000 km     1 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  more of these conditions        In heavy city traffic where the outside  temperature regularly reaches 90  F   32  C  or higher      In hilly or mountainous terrain        When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service     If        do not use your vehicle under any af  these conditions  the fluid and filter do not  require changing     DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        Part B  Owner Checks and Services    Listed below are owner checks and services which  should be performed at the intervals specified to help  ensure the safety  dependability and emission control  performance of your vehicle    Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once   Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your  vehicle  make sure they are the proper ones  as shown in  Part D     At Each Fuel Fill    It is important for vou or a service station attendant       perform these underhood checks at each fuel
26.  General Motors vehicles  All passenger type    6 38     P Metric  tires must conform to Federal safety  requirements in addition to these grades     Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance    The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced  carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life  and best overall performance     In most cases  you will not need to have your wheels  aligned again  However  if you notice unusual tire wear  or your vehicle pulling one way or the other  the  alignment may need to be reset  If you notice your  vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road  your  wheels may need to be rebalanced     Wheel Replacement    Replace any wheel that is bent  cracked  or badly rusted  or corroded  If wheel nuts keep coming loose  the wheel   wheel bolts  and wheel nuts should be replaced  If the  wheel leaks air  replace it  except some aluminum  wheels  which can sometimes be repaired   See your  Pontiac dealer if any of these conditions exist     Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need     Each new wheel should have the same load carrying  capacity  diameter  width  offset  and be mounted the  same way as the one it replaces        If you need to replace any of your wheels  wheel bolts   or wheel nuts  replace them only with new GM original  equipment parts  This way  you will be sure to have the  right wheel  wheel bolts  and wheel nuts for your  Pontiac model          CAUTION     Using the wrong replacement wheels  wheel bolts   or wheel n
27.  In an  emergency  you can use a cloth or a paper towel  to do this  but be sure to use a scraper or wire  brush later  if you need to  to get all the rust or  dirt off     13  Replace the wheel nuts  with rounded end of the  nuts toward the wheel            sure each wheel  stud is centered in each  wheel hole while  tightening the nuts   Tighten each nut by  hand until the wheel is  held against the hub        12  Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts   mounting surfaces and spare wheel  Place the spare  on the wheel mounting surface           5 28        S        15  Tighten the wheel nuts  firmly in a criss cross  sequence        14  Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench  counterclockwise on the jack  Lower the jack  completely      N CAUTION     Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened  wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose  and even come off  This could lead to an accident     Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts  If you have  to replace them  be sure to get the right kind   Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the  nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 100 Ib ft   140 Nem      Don t try to put the wheel cover on the compact spare  tire  It won t fit  Store the wheel cover in the trunk until  you have replaced the compact spare tire with a regular  tire     NOTICE     Wheel covers won t fit on your compact spare  If      you try to put a wheel cover on your compact  spare  you could damage the cover or the spare     5 30          Whe
28.  Institute    certified for gasoline engines     MERI UA DO NOT USE SAE 20 50 OR ANY OTHER  You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED    vehicle  as shown in the Following chart           6 14                   M                                    r           As shown in the chart  SAE 10W 30 15 best for your  vehicle  However  you can use SAE 5W 30 if it s  going to be colder than 60  F  16  C  before your   next oil change  When it s very cold  you should use  SAE 5W 30  These numbers on an oil container show  its viscosity  or thickness  Do not use other viscosity    oils  such as SAE 20W 50     NOTICE     Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum  Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines       Starburst    symbol  Failure to use the proper oil  can result in engine damage not covered by your  warranty     GM Goodwrench  oil  in Canada  GM Engine        meets all the requirements        your vehicle     Engine Oil Additives    Don t add anything to your oil  Your Pontiac dealer is    ready to advise if vou think something should be added        When to Change Engine Oil   See if any one of these is true for you       Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles  8 to 16 km    This is particularly important when outside  temperatures are below freezing       Most trips include extensive idling  such as frequent  driving in stop and go traffic      Most trips are through dusty areas     You frequently tow    trailer or use a carrier on t
29.  PART      NUMBER   DESCRIPTION USAGE  12345343 16 oz   04 73L    Coodwrench    Liquid Wax    Ewenerpelsh    1054777      o  WILI     Du      Spy            Silicone Grease MWeutherstrigs  Stops squeaks  105 786          CUOI   1054172  6 og            Tur und Rond      Remover Also removes alil wanes  polishes  105014 1       iO ITALO White Sidewall Tire Clearet            white und bl  ck tires    uasa 32       0 9461   Vinyl Leather Cleaner Spot and stain removal    1050427   menge              Also spat cleans vinyls    1050429 Multi Purpose  Powdered Cleaner Cleans vinyl and cloth  als  tires ami mura  1052340 12 ox  Nake    Lubrigdate  White Creuse  lor hood  trunk  door hinges and         51055   Ge   0 373  Vinyl tap dressing    1091515 Windshicld washing system      ot recuamienaled for pigskin suede luther     See your General Motors Parts Departments for these products   See your Maintenance Schedule for other products                  M    Vehicle Identification Number  VIN       TI IIT        o SA i    PLEAUXS MO  25 5   LA    ENGINE 1985   gt     CODE MODEL YEAR    This is the legal identifier for your Pontiac  It appears on     plate in the front corner of the instrument panel  on the  driver s side  You can see it if you look through the  windshield from outside your vehicle  The VIN also  appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts  labels and the certificates of title and registration     Engine Identification    The eighth character in your VIN i
30.  a door or the trunk is opened without the key or  Remote Keyless Entry transmitter  the alarm will go off   It will also go off if the trunk lock is damaged  Your  vehicle s lamps will flash and the horn will sound for  three minutes  then will go off to save battery power     Remember  the theft deterrent system won t activate if  you lock the doors with a key or manual door lock  It  activates only if you use a power door lock switch or  Remote Keyless Entry transmitter     Avoid setting off the alarm by accident     If you don t want to activate the theft deterrent system   the vehicle should be locked after the doors are closed   Always unlock a door with a key  or use the Remote  Keyless Entry System transmitter  Unlocking a door any  other way will set off the alarm        Stopping the alarm  If you set off the alarm by accident     unlock any door with your key  You can also turn off the    alarm by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote  Keyless Entry System transmitter  The alarm won t stop  if you try to unlock    door any other way     Testing the alarm  Open the window  then follow the  directions for activating the system described earlier   Once the alarm is set  reach through the window and  manually unlock the door from the inside or turn on the  ignition  The alarm should sound    If the alarm does not sound when it should  check to see  if the horn works  The horn fuse may be blown  To  replace the fuse  see  Fuses and Circuit Breakers  in the  Index    T
31.  a light turns green  and just before you start to  move  check both ways for vehicles that have not  cleared the intersection or may be running the red  light                 f0  V     555         4 19    Freeway Driving       Mile for mile  freeways  also called thruways  park ways     expressways  turnpikes  or superhighways  are the safest  of all roads  But they have their own special rules     The most important advice on freeway driving is  Keep  up with traffic and keep to the right  Drive at the same  speed most of the other drivers are driving  Too fast or  too slow driving breaks    smooth traffic Flow  Treat the  left lane on a freeway as a passing lane     At the entrance there is usually    ramp that leads to the  freeway  If you have a clear view of the freeway as you  drive along the entrance ramp  you should begin to  check traffic  Try to determine where you expect to  blend with the flow  Try to merge into the gap at close to  the prevailing speed  Switch on your turn signal  check  your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as  necessary  Try to hlend smoothly with the traffic flow     Once you are on the freeway  adjust your speed to the  posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it s slower  Stay  in the right lane unless you want to pass    Before changing lanes  check your mirrors  Then use  your turn signal    Just before you leave the lane  glance quickly over your  shoulder to make sure there isn t another vehicle in your   blind  spot     
32.  a slash through it in this  book     This safety symbol means   Don t    Don t do this   or   Don t let this happen      Vehicle Damage Warnings    Also  in this book you will find these notices     NOTICE     These mean there is something that  could damage vour vehicle        In the notice area  we tell you about something that can  damage your vehicle  Many times  this damage would  not be covered by your warranty  and it could be costly   But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the  damage    When you read other manuals  you might see  CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or  in different words    You ll also see warning labels on your vehicle  They use  vellow for cautions  blue for notices and the words  CAUTION or NOTICE     A                           _ eee SSS EE                    L   S S   2a hh    ______     Vehicle Symbols    These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle     These symbols  have po do with  vour lights     MASTER          LIGHTING      SWITCH           TURN  sica  Xp        S  pe  i    sev JAN    For example   these symbols  are used on ar  original battery     These symbols  are imp  wrtani  for you and  your passengers  whenever your  vehicle is  driven     DOOR LOCK    UNLOCK    POWER   l    WINDOW    4    AIR BAG      These symbols  are on some of       controls     WINDSHIELD  CAUTION WIPER  POSSIBLE   INJURY    mous aim   od    WINDSHIELD  WASHER        WINDSHIELD   DEFROSTER    REAR  WINDOW  DEF  GGER 
33.  a tape loaded and the radio is  playing  press TAPE PLAY to play your tape  To return  to the radio while a tape is playing  press AM FM  The  cassette will remain safely inside the radio for future  listening     PREV  Press PREV  previous  or SEEK to search for   the previous selection on the tape  There must be a gap  of at least four seconds between selections in order for  the tape player to stop     NEXT  Press NEXT or SEEK to search for the next  selection on the tape  There must be a gap of at least  three seconds between selections on the tape in order for  the tape player to stop     PROG  Press PROG  program  to play the other side of  the tape          Dolby  B Noise Reduction  This audio system  has available Dolby B Noise Reduction to reduce  background noise on Dolby encoded tapes  When  playing a cassette tape  press the Dolby symbol to  reduce background noise on your tape  The Dolby  symbol will appear in the display  Dolby B Noise  Reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby  Laboratories Licensing Corporation  Dolby    and the    3 11         symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories  Licensing Corporation     REV  Press REV  reverse  to rapidly reverse a tape   Press REV again to play the tape  The radio will play  while the tape is reversing  Use SEEK or the TUNE  knob to change the radio station during reverse    FWD  Press FWD  forward to rapidly advance the tape   Press FWD again to play the tape  The radio will play  while the tape is advan
34.  above  try calibrating the compass as follows    1  Drive the car to an open  flat area     2  Press and hold the MODE button until the  CALIBRATE light reappears        Led    Release the MODE button  The heading display will  start to rotate          Drive the car in small circles  Don t drive faster than  10 mph     Drive in circles until the CALIBRATE light goes  out  It usually takes 1 to 5 circles                 Your compass should be calibrated  You will know  this when the direction bars are on and the  CALIBRATE light is off     Compass Accuracy  Your compass may show different  headings around bridges  power lines  large metal  objects  and steep hills  This is normal and 15 true of  compasses in general     If you put large metal objects like golf clubs in the trunk  they could affect accuracy  If the accuracy is close  the  compass will adapt to these objects over time     If you use an antenna with    magnetic base  it is best to  mount it away from the center of the trunk near the rear  window           The rear defog system can affect accuracy  and the  compass corrects for the rear defog  However  if the rear  defog is turned on while making sharp turns  the  accuracy may be off  When you turn the rear defog off  again  the accuracy returns to normal     Do not turn on the rear defog if you are trying to  calibrate  The system will not allow the calibration  You  will hear the chime  and CALIBRATE will flash for a  few seconds     Be aware that metal objects
35.  again to  reset the system  If the light still stays on  or comes on  again while you re driving  your Pontiac needs service   If the regular brake system warning light isn t on  you  still have brakes  but you don t have anti lock brakes   If the regular brake system warning light is also on  you  don t have anti lock brakes and there s a problem with  your regular brakes  See  Brake System Warning Light   earlier in this part        Traction Control System Warning Light   Option     This warning light  should come on briefly  as you start the engine     If the warning light doesn t come on then  have it fixed  so it will he ready to warn you if there s a problem  If it  stays on  or comes on when you re driving  there may be  a problem with your traction control system and your  vehicle may need service  When this warning light is on   the system will not limit wheel spin  Adjust your driving  accordingly        2 54        The traction control system warning light may come on  for the following reasons     e If you turn the system off by pressing the button  located on the center console  the warning light will  come on and stay on  To turn the system back on   press the button again  The warning light should go  off   See    Traction Control System  in the Index for  more information          Ifthere s    brake system problem that is specifically  related to traction control  the traction control system  will turn off and the warning light will come on  If  your brakes b
36.  are sometimes buried in the  ground  They can affect accuracy and you may not know    they are there  As an example  many concrete roads  have metal reinforcements inside     2 71    NOTES    2 72    Y Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems       In this section you ll find out how to operate the comfort  control systems and audio systems offered with your  Pontiac  Be sure to read about the particular system  supplied with your vehicle    This section tells you how to make your air system work  for you  Your Comfort Control System uses the new  ozone Iriendly R 134a refrigerant     Fresh air from outside your vehicle flows through your  Pontiac when the car is moving  When the vehicle 15 not  moving  you can get outside air to flow through by  selecting any air choice  except the rear window  defogger  and any fan speed  The air conditioner and  heater work hest if you keep your windows closed while  using them     Adjust the direction of air flow by moving the louvered  vents on the instrument panel           If you have the rear seat  passenger outlet  vou can  adjust the air flow toward  either seating area  the floor  or upward     Standard Climate Control       99 Fan Control  The control marked with the fan  symbol is the fan control  Turning the control to the right   clockwise  will increase the fan speed  to the left   counter clockwise  will decrease the fan speed  The fan is  always running unless the mode control is moved to OFF     Temperature Control  Th
37.  auto  button is pushed  Notice the arrows in the display     The HEAT mode supplies air to the floor outlets and is  used primarily in cold weather  To adjust the temperature  of the air supplied  press the TEMP button up or down     DEFOG delivers air to the floor and the windshield  outlets and is used on cold  humid days when some  window fogging occurs    BI LEVEL delivers warm air to the floor and cooler air to  the middle outlets  Bi level is used on cool but sunny days   In each of these modes  the fan speed may be adjusted  by pushing the fan button up or down as necessary for  comfort  To warm or cool the air delivered  push the  TEMP button up or down     OFF  This button is used to turn off the system  Fresh  air will continue to flow through the vehicle  and the  system will try to maintain the previously set  temperature  The outside temperature will show in the  display when the system is OFF     AJC  Press the A C button to tum the air conditioning on  and off  The system will cool and dehumudify the air inside  the car  In the AUTO mode the display will indicate that  A C is on  but the air conditioning compressor only operates  when the system determines it is needed  Slight changes in  engine power may be felt as the compressor cycles     lt   Recire  When RECIRC is selected  the system  will limit the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle   This is helpful when you are trying to cool the air  quickly or limit odors entering your vehicle  In the  AUTO m
38.  been reformulated to  reduce vehicle emissions     6 4    Fuel  3800 Supercharged Engine  Code 1     The  amp th digit of your vehicle identification number   VIN  shows the code letter for your engine  You will  find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel     See  Vehicle Identification Number  in the Index      Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or  higher  You may use middle grade or regular unleaded  gasolines  but your vehicle may not accelerate as well   The gasaline you use should meet specifications   ASTM D4814 in the United States and CGSB 3 5 92   in Canada  These fuels should have the proper additives   so you should not have to add anything to the fuel     In the United States and Canada  it s casy to be sure you  get the right kind of gasoline  unleaded   You ll see  UNLEADED right on the pump  And only unleaded  nozzles will fit into your vehicle s filler neck     Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91    at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular   If the  octane is less than 87  you may get a heavy knocking  noise when you drive  If it s bad enough  it can damage  your engine        If you re using fuel rated at 91 octane or higher and you  still hear heavy knocking  your engine needs service   But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when  you re accelerating or driving up    hill  That s normal  and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid  of pinging  It s the heavy  constant knock that mea
39.  can significantly  affect the quality of the air we breathe  Improper fluid  levels or even the wrong tire inflation can increase the  level of emissions from your vehicle  To help protect our  environment  and to help keep your vehicle in good  condition  please maintain your vehicle properly          7 1    How This Section is Organized  The remainder of this section is divided into five parts        Part A  Scheduled Maintenance Services    shows  what to have done and how often  Some of these  services can be complex  so unless you are technically  qualified and have the necessary equipment  you should  let your dealer s service department or another qualified  service center do these jobs     A  CAUTION   Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can    be dangerous  In trying to do some jobs  you can  be seriously injured  Do your own maintenance    work only if you have the required know how  and the proper tools and equipment for the job   If you have any douht  have a qualified     technician do the work     If you are skilled enough to do some work on your  vehicle  you will probably want to get the service  information GM publishes  See    Service Publications   in the Index     7 2        Part B  Owner Checks and Services  tells you what  should he checked whenever you stop for fuel  It also  explains what you can easily do to help keep your  vehicle in good condition      Part C  Periodic Maintenance Inspections  explains  important inspections that your Pontiac 
40.  center will pop back by  itself  Pull out the entire unit to use     NOTICE   Don t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand  while it is heating  If vou do  it won t be able to    back away from the heating element when it s  ready  That can make it overheat  damaging the  lighter and the heating element             2 47    Accessory Outlet       On models with the overhead console  there is a 12 volt  ignition fed outlet  Slide the cover aside to access the  outlet     NOTICE   Adding some electrical equipment to your vehicle  can damage it or keep other things from working    as they should  This wouldn t be covered hy your  warranty  Check with your dealer before adding  electrical equipment  and never use anything  requiring more than 15 amps           The Instrument Panel    Your  Information System    Your instrument panel is designed to let you know at     glance how your vehicle is running  You ll know how  fast you re going  how much fuel you re using  and  many other things you ll need to drive safely and  economically                         1    i    yoy        A rt  Ad                          E   7 F      je    Instrument Panel Clusters    Your Pontiac 15 equipped with one of these instrument  panel clusters  which includes indicator warning lights  and gages that are explained on the following pages  Be  sure to read about those that apply to the instrument  panel cluster for your vehicle        Cluster with Compass and Boost Gage       Cluster with Gages  
41.  fill     Engine Oil Level    Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if  necessary  See    Engine Oil  in the Index for further  details     Engine Coolant Level    Check the engine coolant level and add the proper  coolant mix if necessary  See  Coolant  in the Index for  further details     Windshield Washer Fluid Level   Check the windshield washer fluid level in the  windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if  necessary  See  Windshield Washer Fluid  in the Index  for further details     At Least Once a Month    Tire Inflation   Check tire inflation  Make sure tires are inflated to the  pressures specified on the Tire  Loading Information  label located on the rear edge of the driver s door  See   Tires  in the Index for further details      Cassette Deck    Clean cassette deck  Cleaning should be done every  50 hours of tape play  See  Audio Systems  in the Index  for further details     Power Antenna    Clean power antenna mast  See  Audio Systems  in the  Index for further details                                                     na 7 37    At Least Once a Year    Kev Lock Cylinders    Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant  specified in Part D     Body Lubrication    Lubricate all body door hinges  Also lubricate all hinges  and latches  including those for the hood  rear  compartment  glove box door  console door and any  folding seat hardware  Part D tells you what to use   More frequent lubrication may be required when  exposed to 
42.  fluid that has sufficient  protection against freezing     To Add       Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY  Add  washer fluid until the tank 1s full        6 26           NOTICE     e When using concentrated washer fluid   follow the manufacturer s instructions for    adding water      Don t mix water with ready to use washer  fluid  Water can cause the solution to freeze  and damage vour washer fluid tank and  other parts of the washer system  Also     water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid       Fill your washer fluid tank only 3 4 full  when it s very cold  This allows for  expansion  which could damage the tank if  it is completelv full       Don t use radiator antifreeze in your  windshield washer  It can damage your  washer system and paint     Brakes fluid is leaking out of the brake system  If it is  vou  should have your brake system fixed  since a leak means  Brake Master Cylinder that sooner or later your brakes won t work well  or     won t work at all  So  it isn t a good idea to    top        your brake fluid  Adding brake fluid won t correct a  leak  If you add fluid when your linings are worn  then  you ll have too much fluid when you get new brake  linings  You should add  or remove  brake fluid  as  necessary  only when work is done on the brake  hydraulic system     Your brake master cylinder is here  It is filled with  DOT 3 brake fluid          CAUTION     If you have too much brake fluid  it can spill on  the engine  The fluid will burn if the 
43.  for help     6 16    Air Cleaner    Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to  replace the air filter     See  Scheduled Maintenance Services  in the Index           CAUTION     Operating the engine with the air cleaner off can  cause you or others to be burned  The air cleaner  not only cleans the air  it stops          if the engine  backfires  If it isn t there  and the engine     backfires  you could be burned  Don t drive with  Misi wei                   Gui          NOTICE     If the air cleaner is off  a backfire can cause a    damaging engine fire  And  dirt can easily get  into your engine  which will damage it  Always  have the air cleaner in place when you re driving           To Check or Replace       7j  dai    Unscrew the clamp on the air intake hose where the      hose attaches near the top of the engine  Detach the  1  Unscrew the three wing screws in the housing cover hose  then pull back the rear of the housing cover    and pull back   If you have the 3800 Supercharged engine  unsnap   the three clips holding the air cleaner housing cover   and pull apart                          Supercharger Oil       3  Remove the air filter     4  Install the air filter carefully and replace the cover  tightly     5  Reattach the air intake hose and tighten the clamp     Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper  tools  you should let your dealer or a qualified service  center perform this maintenance                                      When 
44.  hours of use to provide optimum performance   Your radio may display Cln to remind you that you have  used your tape player for 50 hours without re setting the  tape clean timer  If you notice a reduction in sound  quality  regardless of when the tape player was last  cleaned  try playing a different cassette tape to see if the  tape or tape player is at fault  If the second cassette tape  results in no improvement in sound quality  try cleaning  the tape player           Proper tape player cleaning should be done with a  scrubbing action  non abrasive cleaning cassette  This  is    wet type cleaning system that uses a cleaning  cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs  of the cleaner cassette turn  If you use this type of  cleaner  the radio may display an error and eject the  cartridge  This 1s normal and is the result of an added  feature in the tape player that detects broken tapes  If an  error message is displayed while cleaning  you will need  to insert the cleaning cassette at least three times to  thoroughly clean the tape player     You may prefer to use a non scrubbing action  wet type  cleaner  This type of cleaner uses a cassette with a fabric  belt which cleans the tape head  This type of cleaning  cassette will not cause an error  but it may not clean the  tape player as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner     Cleaning cassettes are available in most stores that sell  audio products or from your General Motors dealer   Follow the instructi
45.  it   s dark enough outside  your low beam  headlamps will change to full brightness  The other  lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come  on  When it s bright enough outside  the regular lamps  will go off  and your low beam headlamps change to the  reduced brightness of DRL     To idle your vehicle with the DEL olf  shift the  transaxle into PARK  P   The DRL will stay off until  you shift out of PARK  P      As with any vehicle  you should turn on the regular  headlamp system any time you need it    At night  you can turn off all exterior lamps when you  are in PARK  P  by moving the twilight sentinel control  all the way to OFF  If it was off  move the control to the  right to turn it on  then back off  The lamps will come  back on when you put the transaxle in gear     Headlamp High Low Beam Changer    To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high  to low  pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you   Then release it    When the high beams are on  this blue light on the  instrument panel also will be on        PM I    Instrument Panel Intensity Control    You can brighten or dim your instrument cluster lamps  by rotating the headlamp switch  Rotate the switch all  the way counterclockwise to turn on the interior  courtesy lamps  Rotate the switch clockwise to turn off  the instrument cluster lamps and displays     Twilight Sentinel  Option     Push in the headlamp switch  to turn your headlamps off     TWILIGHT  SENTINEL    Rotate the twilight 
46.  it with a paper towel or    cloth  then push it back in all the way  Remove it again   keeping the tip down  and check the level        When to Add Oil    If the oil is at or below the ADD line  then you ll need  to add some oil  But you must use the right kind  This  part explains what kind of oil to use  For crankcase  capacity  see    Capacities and Specifications  in the  Index        NOTICE       Don t add too much oil  If your engine has so  much oil that the oil level gets above the  cross hatched area that shows the proper  operating range  your engine could be damaged          Just fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the  proper operating range  Push the dipstick all the way  back in when you re through     6 13    What Kind of Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE DILS   Oils of the proper quality for your vehicle can be   FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING  SELECT THE LOWEST  identified by looking for the    Starburst    symbol  The SAE WISCOSITY GRADE 011 FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE      Starburst    symbol indicates that the oil has been  certified by the American Petroleum Institute  API   and  is preferred for use in your gasoline engine  HOT  WEATHER      1                     TW  30    jenen   E                 If you change your own oil  be sure you use oil that has  the    Starburst    symbol on the front of the oil container   If you have your oil changed for you  be sure the oil put  into your engine is American Petroleum
47.  may have to do it more than once      Things like tar  asphalt and shoe polish will stain if  vou don t get them off quickly  Use    clean cloth and     GM Vinyl Learther Cleaner or equivalent product     Cleaning Leather    Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or  saddle soap         For stubborn stains  use a GM Vinyl Leather Cleaner  or equivalent product       Never use oils  varnishes  solvent based or abrasive  cleaners  furniture polish or shoe polish on leather       Soiled leather should be cleaned immediately  IF dirt  is allowed to work inte finish  it can harm the leather     Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel    Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces  of the instrument panel  Sprays containing silicones or  waxes        cause annoying reflections in the windshield  and even make n difficult to see through the windshield  under certain conditions        6 42           Care of Safety Belts    Keep belts clean and dry        CAUTION   Do not bleach or dye safety belts  If you do  it    may severely weaken them  In a crash they might  not be able to provide adequate protection  Clean  safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm   water     Glass   Glass should be cleaned often  GM Glass Cleaner  GM  Part No  1050427  or a liquid household glass cleaner  will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films     Don t use abrasive cleaners on glass  hecause they may  cause scratches  Avoid placing decals on the inside rear  window  si
48.  need one replaced     e       SE EEA    L       2   E    Position Circuitry    Door Locks  Power Antenna  Lock Switch  Horns  Mut Used  Cruise Control  Misc  Engine  Controls                POTIONE    LE kd    Fui  bel    Fuel Pump   Injectors   Electronic Control Module   PASS Key  Tl   Nor Used                   Nor               Programmer  Not Used    CuI    L  LJ  E                             BEI OEE       ceg    CJ           L   q          0      L               E               6 52    Replacement Bulbs    Outside Lamps Bulh  Halogen Headlamps   Low beam    v v               High Beam 21 20 222 212225 22   22  1 9005  Front Lamps                Lees eere             Side Mather i    euo e         Tmlimps                       eR  DOM  SIODINMTIDR  coax seeded beck Fes ee AY                  156  Rear Side Marker   Sepa ee eee ee LS  Back Up Lamps    e L141  Center High Mounted Stop Lis certa d  License Plate Lamp                   194  POR LAND    ir           880  Trunk Lamp    auc 434  RA 93   Underhood Lamp                            56     LAMP MONITOR MESSAGE    HEAD LAMP  HIGH BEAM LAMP    PARK LAMP TURN SIGNAL  PARK LAMP   TAIL LAMP   BRAKE LAMP   TURN SIGNAL LAMP           LAMP   BACK UP LAMP   BREAK LAMP   TAIL LAMP    6 53    Replacement Bulbs    Inside Lamps    Door Lamps         Front Courtesy Reading             Rail Courtesy Reading Lamps        Glove Compartment Lamp                Bulb        14    563    12V 8 W Festoon  194    Visor Vanity Lamp   ree
49.  other rear door lock     The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from  inside when this feature is in use  If you want to open a  rear door when the security lock is on     1  Unlock the door from the inside   2  Then open the door from the outside     If vou don t cancel the security lock feature  adults or  older children who ride in the rear won t be able to open  the rear door from the inside  You should let adults and  alder children know how these security locks work  and  how to cancel the locks          cancel the rear door lock     1  Unlock the door from the inside and open the door  from the outside     2  Move the lever all the way down   3  Do the same for the other rear door   The rear door locks will now work normally     Glove Box    Use the door key to lock and unlock the glove box  To  open  lift the latch release on the left side of the glove  box door     2 8       Theft   Vehicle theft is big business  especially in some cities   Although your Pontiac has a number of theft deterrent  features  we know that nothing we put on it can make it  impossihle to steal  However  there are ways you can  help     Key in the Ignition    If you walk away from your vehicle with the keys  inside  it   s an easy target for joy riders or professional  thieves     so don t do it     When you park your Pontiac and open the driver s door   you ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key  from the ignition and take it with you  Always do this   Your steering wheel
50.  re      the PERFORM  SHIFT mode    Press NORMAL SHIFT to have the transaxle shift at  lower engine speeds  increasing fuel economy  An    indicator light on the switch will glow when normal  shifting is in operation     Computer Command Ride  Option     Vehicles equipped with COMPUTER COMMAND  RIDE provide improved passenger ride comfort under     variety of road and driving conditions     For normal driving conditions  press the TOURING  RIDE button to get a more refined comfortable ride   When driving conditions require improved handling   press the PERFORM RIDE button to get a firm ride   This mode minimizes how much the passenger  compartment leans in turns  and decreases the  up and down motion of the front and rear of the vehicle  during acceleration or braking    Note that even in the TOURING RIDE mode  the  system will adjust to rapid cornering  acceleration or  braking        M           Parking Brake       To set the parking brake  hold the regular brake pedal  down with your right foot  Push down the parking brake  pedal with vour left foot  If the ignition is on  the brake  system warning light will come on    If you start to drive away with the parking brake set  a  chime will sound after the vehicle has traveled 46 feet   14 meters         To release the parking brake  use the PUSH TO  RELEASE park brake pedal  Hold the regular brake  pedal down with your right foot and push the park brake  pedal with your left foot  This will unlock the pedal   When you lift y
51.  technicians     Service Bulletins    service bulletins covering various subjects are regularly  sent to all General Motors dealerships retail facilities   GM monitors product performance in the field  When  service methods are found which promote better service  on GM vehicles  bulletins are created to help the  technician perform better service  Service bulletins may  involve any number of vehicles  Some will describe    inexpensive service  others will describe expensive  service  Some will advise new or unexpected conditions   and others may help avoid future costly repairs  Service  bulletins are meant for qualified technicians  In some  cases they refer to service manuals  specialized tools   equipment and safety procedures necessary to service  the vehicle  Since these bulletins are issued throughout  the model year and bevond  an index is required and  published quarterly to help identify specific bulletins   Subscriptions are available  You can order an index at  the toll free numbers listed previously  or ask    GM  dealer rerailer to see an index or individual bulletin     Owner Publications    Owner s manuals  warranty folders and various owner  assistance booklets provide owners with general  operation and maintenance information           NOTES            R 8 9    NOTES    8 10       NOTES             8 11    NOTES    8 12    Y Section 9 Index          Accessory Power Gutke      sie s mur x19 or wv tn nye      Antenna  Fixed Mast UE OE TL    3 20  Adding Antenna
52.  the belt       going too far into the retractor at  ihe top of the seatback  Pull the shoulder belt out of  the retractor  and place the guide over the belt  Make  sure that the guide is between the button stop on the  belt and the retractor  Insert the two edges of the belt  into the slots of the guide        4  Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat  The  elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top     1 28       5  Buckle the belt around the child  and make sure that  both the lap belt and the shoulder belt are secured  properly  Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the  shoulder  See    Safety Belts  Rear Seat Passengers    in  the Index        To remove and store the comfort guides  just perform Smaller Children and Babies  these steps in reverse order  Squeeze the belt edges  together so that you can take them out from the guides   Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip  and  then slide the guide onto the clip  Rotate the guide and  clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior  body  leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed     Children    Everyone in a vehicle needs protection  That includes  infants and all children smaller than adult size  In fact   the law in every state in the United States and in every  Canadian province says children up to some age must be  restrained while in a vehicle           1 29    CAUTION   Continued    at only 25 mph  40 km h   a 12 pound  5 5 kg   baby will suddenly become    24
53.  the dark  When you are faced  with severe glare  as from a driver who doesn t lower  the high beams  or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps    slow down a little  Avoid staring directly into the  approaching lights     Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle  clean     inside and out  Glare at night is made much  worse by dirt on the glass  Even the inside of the glass  can build up a film caused by dust  Dirty glass makes  lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would   making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly     Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a  roadway when you are in a turn or curve  Keep your    eyes moving  that way  it s easier to pick out dimly    lighted objects  Just as your headlamps should be  checked regularly for proper aim  so should your eyes  be examined regularly  Some drivers suffer from night  blindness    the inability to see in dim light    and  aren t even aware of it            4 15    Driving in the Rain       4 16    Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble  On a wet  road you can t stop  accelerate or turn as well because  your tire to road traction isn t as good as on dry roads   And  if your tires don t have much tread left  vou ll get  even less traction  It s always wise to go slower and be  cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving  The  surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are  tuned for driving on dry pavement     The heavier the rain  the harder it is to see  Even if
54.  the parking brake set  try to turn  the key to LOCK in each shift lever position        The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift  lever is in PARK  P         The key should come out only in LOCK     Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK  P   Mechanism Check     N CAUTION     When vou are doing this check  your vehicle  could begin to move  You or others could he    injured and property could be damaged  Make  sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case  it begins to roll  Be ready to apply the regular  brake at once should the vehicle begin to move        Park on a fairly steep hill  with the vehicle facing   downhill  Keeping your foot on the regular brake  set the   parking brake        Tocheck the parking brake  With the engine running  and transaxle in NEUTRAL  N   slowly remove foot  pressure from the regular brake pedal  Do this until  the vehicle is held by the parking brake only         Tocheck the PARK  P  mechanism s holding ability   Shift to PARK  P   Then release all brakes   Underbody Flushing    At least every spring  use plain water to flush any  corrosive materials from the underbody  Take care to  clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other dehris  can collect     7 40      Part C  Periodic Maintenance  Inspections    Listed below are inspections and services which should  be performed at least twice a year  for instance  each  spring and fall   You should let your GM dealer s  service department or other qualified service center do  
55.  three seconds when  the ignition is turned to the  RUN position  as a bulb  check to show you that the  system 1s working        If the light doesn t come on  have your oil level warning  system serviced     Even if you have a low oil level  the light will go off for  15 to 20 seconds  Then  if the oil level is low  and it has  been at least eight minutes since your engine was last  running  the CHECK OIL LEVEL light will come on  for 20 to 40 seconds  The eight minute delay allows the  majority of the oil to drain back into the oil pan and  prevent a false low condition     If the CHECK OIL LEVEL warning comes on  the oil  level should be checked at the oil dipstick  If the level is  low  the engine oil should be brought up to the proper  level  See    Engine Oil    in the Index  After restoring the  proper level and waiting for the eight minute drainback   the key can he turned to the RUN position and the  CHECK OTL LEVEL warning light should only come  on as a bulb check     Head Up Display  Option    If you have the optional Head Up Display  HUD   you  can sce some of the driver information also available on  your instrument panel cluster  The information may be  displayed in English or metric units and appears as a  reflection on the windshield  The HUD shows       Speedometer reading      Turn signal indicators     High beam indicator symbol       CHECK GAGES message  For low oil pressure  high    coolant temperature  low oil level and low fuel     e Low fucl warning s
56.  to  fasten their safety belts  The safety belt light will also  come on and stay on for about 60 seconds  If the driver s  belt is already buckled  neither the chime nor the light  will come on     2 52        Air Bag Readiness Light    There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel   which shows INFLATABLE RESTRAINT  The system  checks the air bag s electrical system for malfunctions  The  light tells you if there is an electrical problem  The system  check includes the air bag sensors and the wiring and the  diagnostic module  For more information on the air bag  system  see  Air Bag  in the Index     You will see this light flash  for a few seconds when you  turn your ignition to RUIN  or START  Then the light  should go out  This means  the system is ready     If the air bag readiness light doesn t come on when you  start your vehicle  or stays on  or comes on when you  are driving  your air bag system may not work properly   Have your vehicle serviced right away        Brake System Warning Light    Your Pontiac s hydraulic  brake system is divided into  two parts  If one part isn t  working  the other part can     still work and stop vou  For  good braking  though  you  need both parts working  well         If the warning light comes on  there could be a brake  problem  Have your brake system inspected right away     This light should come on briefly as you start the  vehicle  If it doesn t come on then  have it fixed so it  will be ready to warn you if the
57.  to change between the clock    and the radio or the cassette CD track selection  The  display will automatically return to clack     PRE SET  Press PRE SET    to hear the radio stations  that are set on your system     VOL  Press VOL  volume  to increase or decrease the  volume     PWR  Press the PWR switch to turn the system on and  off        Understanding Radio Reception  FM Stereo    FM Stereo will give you the best sound  but FM signals  will reach only about 10 to 40 miles  16 to 65 km   Tall  buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals  causing  the sound to come and go     AM    The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM   especially at night  The longer range  however  can  cause stations to interfere with each other  AM can also  pick up noise from things like storms and power lines   To lower this noise  try reducing the treble level     AM Stereo    Your Delco  system may be able to receive C Quam    stereo broadcasts  Many AM stations around the country  use C Quam to produce stereo  though some do not   C Quam    is a registered trademark of Motorola  Inc  If  your Delco system can get C Quam signals  your stereo  indicator light will come on when you are receiving it   Be aware that hearing damage from loud noise is almost  undetectable until it is too late  Your hearing can adapt  to higher volumes of sound  Sound that seems normal  can be loud and harmful to your hearing  Take    3 18      precautions by adjusting the volume control on vour  
58.  tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of  your vehicle   With some models  you should never  tow a trailer  See    Towing a Trailer  in the Index    Schedule I should also be followed if the vehicle is used  for delivery service  police  taxi  or other commercial  application     Schedule I Intervals       Every 3 000 Miles  5 000 km  or 3 Months   Whichever Occurs First  Engine Oil and Filter Change    Every 6 000 Miles  10 000 km  or 6 months   Whichever Occurs First   Chassis Lubrication   At 6 000 Miles  10 000 Km    Then Every   12 000 Miles  25 000 km    Tire Rotation   Every 15 004  Miles  25        km    Air Cleaner Filter Inspection  if driving in dusty conditions  Every 30 000 Miles  50 000 km    Air Cleaner Filter Replacement   Spark Plug Replacement   Spark Plug Wire Inspection   Fuel Tank  Cap and Lines Inspection   Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection  or every   24 months  whichever occurs first    Cooling System Service  or every 24 months  whichever  occurs first    Supercharger Oil Check  or every 36 months  whichever  occurs first     3 8L Code   engine only    Every 50 000 Miles  83 000 km    Automatic Transaxle Service  severe conditions        mdp               Sass    Maintenance Schedule    Schedule II Definition       Follow Schedule    only if none of the conditions from  Schedule I 15 true             Schedule II Intervals    Every 7 500 Miles  12 500 km    Engine      and Filter Change  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first    Chassis Lubr
59.  wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun   Don t use strong soaps or chemical detergents  Use  liquid hand  dish or car washing  mild detergent  soaps   Don t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based        that contain acid or abrasives  All cleaning agents  should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on  the surtace  or they could stain  Dry the finish with a  soft  clean chamois ora 100  cotton towel to avoid  surface scratches and water spotting     High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your  vehicle     Finish Care   Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your Pontiac by  hand may be necessary to remove residue trom the paint  finish  You can get GM approved cleaning products  from your dealer   See    Appearance Care and Materials   in the Index     Your Pontiac has a  basecoat clearcoat  paint finish   The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored  basecout  Always use waxes and polishes that are  non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint  finish     NOTICE     Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on    a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may dull the  finish or leave swirl marks        Foreign materials such as calcium chlonde und other  salts  ice melting agents  road oil and tar  tree sap  bird  droppings  chemicals from industrial chimneys  etc  can  damage your vehicle s finish if they remain on painted  surfaces  Wash the vehicle as soon as possible  If  necessary  use non abrasive cleaners that are marked  
60.  will be locked  and so will your  ignition and transaxle  And remember to lock the doors     Parking at Night    Park in a lighted spot  close all windows and lock your  vehicle  Remember to keep your valuables out of sight   Put them in a storage area  or take them with you        Parking Lots    If you park in a lot where someone will be watching   your vehicle  its best to lock it up and take your kevs    But what if you have to leave your ignition key  What if   you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle    e Put your valuables in a storage area  like your trunk  or glove box      Lock the glove box      Lock all the doors except the driver s        Then take the door key with you     Universal Theft Deterrent  Option   If your Pontiac has this option  it has a theft deterrent  alarm system  With this system  the SECURITY light  will flash as vou open the door  if your ignition 1s off    This light reminds you to activate the theft deterrent  system when leaving your vehicle     Activating the system   1  Open the door     2  Lock the door with the power door lock switch or  Remote Keyless Entry transmitter  The SECURITY  light should come on and stay                3  Close all doors  The SECURITY light should go off  after about 30 seconds and the system will then be  armed     If the SECURITY light comes on for one minute and  then shuts off while the ignition is on  the security  system has detected a problem with itself  See your  dealer for service     If
61.  with a blow dryer to help prevent a cleaning  ring   See the previous NOTICE      Special Cleaning Problems    Greasy or Oily Stains   Such as grease  oil  butter  margarine  shoe polish    coffee with cream  chewing gum  cosmetic creams    vegetable oils  wax crayon  tar and asphalt       Carctully scrape off excess stain       Follow the solvent type instructions described  earlier           Shoe polish  wax crayon  tar and asphalt will stain if  left on a vehicle seat fabric  They should be removed  as soon as possible  Be careful  because the cleaner  will dissolve them and may cause them to spread     Non Greasy Stains   Such as catsup  coffee  black   egg  fruit  fruit juice    milk  soft drinks  wine  vomit  urine and blood       Carefully scrape off excess stain  then sponge the  soiled area with cool water     e                remains  follow the foam type instructions  deseribed earlier     e lian odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine   treat the area with a water baking soda solution     teaspoon  5 ml  of baking soda        cup  250 ml   of lukewarm water     e l   needed  clean lightly with solvent type cleaner     Combination Stains    Such as candy  ice cream  mayonnaise  chili sauce and  unknown stains        Carefully scrape off excess stain  then clean with  cool water and allow to dry     e  lf astain remains  clean it with solvent type cleaner     Cleaning Vinyl   Use warm water and a clean cloth    e Rub with a clean  damp cloth to remove dirt  You 
62.  you need more light    Be sure the battery has enough water  You don t  need to add water to the Delco Freedom    battery    installed in every new GM vehicle  But if a  battery has filler caps  he sure the right amount  of fluid is there  If it is low  add water to take care  of that first  If you don t  explosive gas could be  present    Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you   Don t get it on you  If you accidentally get it in  your eyes or on your skin  flush the place with  water and get medical help immediately        7  Find the positive     and negative     terminals on    each battery    Check that the jumper cables don t have loose or  missing insulation  If they do  you could get a shock   The vehicles could be damaged  too    Before you connect the cables  here are some basic  things you should know  Positive     will go to  positive     and negative     will go to negative           a metal engine part  Don t connect     to     or  you ll get a short that would damage the battery and  maybe other parts  too      N CAUTION     Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you  badly  Keep your hands away from moving parts  once the engines are running           5 4         6    Wet anre    Connect the red posirive  4  cable to the positive  4   terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery  Use a  remote positive  4   terminal if the vehicle has one     Don t let the other end touch metal  Connect it to the  positive     terminal of the good battery  Use   
63.  your  windshield wiper blades are in good shape  a heavy rain  can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals   pavement markings  the edge of the road  and even  people walking    It s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape  and keep your windshield washer tank filled  Replace  your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of  streaking or missing areas on the windshield  or when  strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts        CAUTION    Wet brakes can cause accidents  They won t work  well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to         side  You could lose control of the vehicle    After driving through a large puddle of water or    2 car wash  apply your brake pedal lightly until  vour brakes work normally        Driving too fast through large water puddles or even  going through some car washes can cause problems  too   The water may affect your brakes  Try to avoid puddles   But if you can t  try to slow down before you hit them        4 17    Hydroplaning Some Other Rainy Weather Tips    Hydroplaning is dangerous  5o much water can build up e Tum on your low beam headlamps    not just your  under your tires that they can actually ride on the water  parking lamps    to help make you more visible to  This can happen if the road is wet enough and you re others    going fast enough  When your vehicle is hydroplaning     qupd harm    Besides slowing down  allow some extra following  it has little or no contact with the road  g 8    dis
64.  your Pontiac by pushing or pulling  it won t work  and it could damage your vehicle        To Jump Start Your Pontiac    1  Check the other vehicle  It must have a 12 volt  battery with a negative ground system     NOTICE       If the other system isn t a 12 volt system with a  negative ground  both vehicles can be damaged        2  Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables  can reach  but be sure the vehicles aren t touching  each other  If they are  it could cause a ground  connection you don t want  You wouldn t be ahle to  start your Pontiac  and the bad grounding could  damage the electrical systems     You could be injured if the vehicles roll  Set the  parking brake firmly on each vehicle  Put an  automatic transaxle in PARK  P  or a manual  transaxle in NEUTRAL          3  Turn off the ignition on both vehicles  Turn off all  lamps that aren t needed  and radios  This will avoid  sparks and help save both batteries  And it could  save your radio     NOTICE     If you leave your radio on  it could be badly    damaged  The repairs wouldn t be covered by  your warranty        4  Open the hoods and locate the batteries        CAUTION   An electric fan can start up even when the engine      is not running and can injure you  Keep hands   clothing and tools away from any underhood  electric fan            N CAUTION     Using a match near a battery can cause battery  gas to explode  People have been hurt doing this   and some have been blinded  Use a flashlight if 
65. 0 pound  110 kg   force on your arms  The baby would be almost  impossible to hold    Secure the baby in an infant restraint     CAUTION    Never hold    baby in your arms while riding in      vehicle  A baby doesn   t weigh much    until a   crash  During a crash a baby will become so   heavy you can t hold it  For example  in a crash  CAUTION   Continued           1 30             Child Restraints    Be sure to follow the instructions Tor the restraint  You   may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in     booklet  or both  These restraints use the belt system in  your vehicle  but the child also has to be secured within    the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury     The instructions that come with the infant or child  restraint will show you how to do that     Where to Put the Restraint    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they  arc restrained in the rear rather than the front seat  We at  General Motors therefore recommend that you put your  child restraint in the rear seat  Mever put a rear facing  child restraint in the front passenger seat  Here s why           CAUTION     A child in a rear facing child restraint can be  seriously injured if the right front passenger s air  bag inflates  This is because the back of a  rear facing child restraint would be very close to  the inflating air bag  Always secure a rear facing    child restraint in the rear seat    You may  however  secure a forward facing child  restraint in 
66. 1995    U   lt       2      al       BONNEVILLE       The 1995 Pontiac Bonneville Owner s Manual  as Se       H SS ee c Re  erp on cem    Seats and Restraint Systems                             KS ERA 2 59 02 Ms RU E NUR n 1 1  This section tells vou how to use your seals and safety belts properly  It also explains the    SRST system    Features and Controls                                                            ME sie   DATI EC 2 1  This section explains how to start and operate your Pontiac   Comfort Controls and Audio Systems        ccccncccsecesssesebevecsererenesterereasees 3 1    This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your  audio system     Your Driving and the Road                                 UE        eek ieee                Here you ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions   Problems on the                                                                                                      5 1    This section tells you what to do if you have    problem while driving  such as a flat lire or engine  overheating  ete     Service and Appearance Care                   0000 Be EGIT See eR REE            Sate 6 1  Here the manual tells you how to keep your Pontiac running properly and looking good  Maintenance Schedule 55 5 44 ccs erue ts                                                    des Paes re x 7 1    This section tells you when to perform vehicle mai
67. 2 45  Supercharged Engine ga eels ee      nns 6 11  Supercharger OI            acm er Rt ED iri Ex   5 18              Coi 3 kD5  usa ks eR die sip EX DEI I ota      6 19   Wit milus Ee Lio arme rmm RE 6 19   When  hi Add                        cca aad e        Supplemental Inflatable Restraint  SIR           cores iin  Symbols  Vehicle                    ee Pug gia Y  Tachometer UD TUUS SEL PT C PETITS PENA      2 51  Taillamp  Bulb Replacement                              6 3   Tamper Resistant Odometer          2 90  Tape Player Care 2    luu bra aia kd ls iR a ER 3 19      Licores racer C                 2 8  Theft Deterrent  Universal            ee 2 9  Theft  ock Feature vale yr m   tnn n skein 3 14       Lco soe EC s OT RV EEE  BHO M ROSEO PR        6 24  Tilt Steering Wheel    ck cee ne a                       TET                           ERI ERE S EX IEEE A            CATE A BINS uorizacerakdcka ke hase da C EE Eon 6 39  Tire Inspection and Rotation 44 55 44 seo cer nn 6 35  TO Bry a        Reg pL arc ai CE OCC CER EGER 4 28  TIER racer ono e HR ee E ERA   6 33  Alignment and Balance              2 2 4 0445 6 38  Buying           eere mre e 6 36  Changing E PIAE          ee as reb  IOTER uranium aH how Ron m                    h 134  Inspection and Rotation             pi I 6 35  que CONI eror                 ERE ar oec arid    32                                      6 38                                 6 37         MENACE E D E UU Cal s RUD PIS PA 6 37  Uniform Qua
68. 28  C    Protect against rust and corrosion    Help keep the proper engine temperature     Let the warning lights work as they should   What to Use    Use a mixture of one half clean water  preferably  distilled  and one half antifreeze that meets    GM  Specification 1825M   which won t damage aluminum  parts  You can also use a recycled coolant conforming to  GM Specification 1825M with    complete coolant flush  and refill  Use GM Engine Coolant Supplement  sealer   with any complete coolant flush and refill  If you use  this mixture  you don t need to add anything else     6 22          AN CAUTION     Adding only plain water to your cooling system  can be dangerous  Plain water  or some other  liquid like alcohol  can hoil before the proper  coolant mix will  Your vehicle s coolant warning  system is set for the proper coolant mix  With  plain water or the wrong mix  your engine could  get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat  warning  Your engine could catch fire and you or  others could be burned  Use a 50 50 mix of clean  water and    proper antifreeze                NOTICE     If you use an improper coolant mix  vour engine  could overheat and be badly damaged  The    repair cost wouldn t be covered by your  warranty  Too much water in the mix can freeze  and crack the engine  radiator  heater core and  other parts           Adding Coolant          To Check Coolant    When your engine 15 cold  the coolant level should be at  FULL COLD or a little higher  When you
69. 800 424 9393  or 366 0123 in the  Washington  D C  area  or write to   NHTSA     5  Department of Transportation  Washington  D C  20590    You can also obtain other information about motor  vehicle safety from the Hotline     REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  TO THE CANADIAN  GOVERNMENT    If you live in Canada  and you believe that your vehicle  has a safety defect  you should immediately notify  Transport Canada  in addition to notifying General  Motors of Canada Limited  You may write to    Transport Canada   Box 8880   Ottawa  Ontario K1G 312     REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  TO GENERAL MOTORS    In addition to notifying NHTSA  or Transport Canada   in a situation like this  we certainly hope you ll notify  us  Please call us at 1 800 PM CARES  or write     Pontiac Division   Customer Assistance Center  One Pontiac Plaza   Pontiac  MI 48340 2950    In Canada  please call us at 1 800 263 3777  English   or 1 800 263 7854  French   Or  write     General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Assistance Center   1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH 8P7                                                  ae             Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program    Security While You Travel  1 800 ROADSIDE 1 800 762 3743    As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle  you are  automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside  Assistance Program  This value added service is  intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive  in the city or travel the open road     Pontiac s Roadside Assista
70. A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering  wheel before you drive    You can also raise it to the highest level to give your  legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle   To tilt the wheel  hold the steering wheel and pull the    lever  Move the steering wheel to a comfortahle level   then release the lever to lock the wheel in place     Turn Signal Multifunction Lever    The lever on the left side of the steering column  includes your     Headlamp High Low Beam   Windshield Wipers   Windshield Washer   Cruise Control  Option    Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator    The high low beam feature is discussed under   Headlamps   See  Headlamps  in the Index                                Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator    The turn signal has two  upward  for right  and two     downward  for left   positions  These positions  allow you to signal a turn or  a lane change         To signal a turn  move the lever all the way up or down   When the turn is finished  the lever will return  automatically    7 A green arrow on the  instrument panel will flash  in the direction of the turn  or lane change        To signal a lane change  just raise or lower the lever  until the green arrow starts to flash  Hold it there until  you complete your lane change  The lever will return by  itself when you release it     As you signal a turn or a lane change  if the arrows don t  flash but just stay on  a signal bulb may be burned out  and other drivers won t see your 
71. After it Inflates                1 20 Automatic Overdrive Position 2 20  When Should it Inflate                      ees 1 19 Drive Position MR       2 21  Air Bag Readiness Light                                    First Gear Position         Air Cleaner                 Meutral Position 22 222 122  cele l 1 20  Air Conditioning    __                           1 2  3 5 Parne Poeta  creer nort mni IR ar E mmn 2 19  Air Inflator System   LEA pem ETE S coe   Reverse Position 2 18  Alarm  Theft Deterrent System  Mu erra ICON M EM Second Gear Position E eer HERE  Alignment and Balance  Tires            rm              i Dima Ru IR ERE E AGE UN Vr eee ee    Aluminum Wheels  Cleaning                     e  6 45       Automatic Transaxle Fluid                                         6 20         ix Wie aue e six aie e ufu a Ux aaa i tess rat ra d 6 2   CHSCEIHE                             Gee er a m de   Banery                 ERE EE A a   Battery Replacement  Remote Keyless Entry            2 6   Battery Warning Light ii i sosto its                 PON m   Battery  Warnings UT EA          EEE         5 2  5 4   BBB Ari LIBE  occa nod    us                    Belt                                              6 11   Belt  Engine Accessory  Supercharged                6 12                                ues asc          dan 4 26   PAE RY PE peo cs rye    SINE eae ME 2 66   Brake Adjustment 3  oss ce vee bes ee ba baa Er          6 29   Brake    Adding iles sete ee tee ne mmm py 6 28   B
72. But then  if you still have the  warning  turn off the engine and get everyone out of the  vehicle until it cools down     You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service  help right away        Cooling System       When you decide it s safe to lift the hood  here s what  you ll see        Coolant recovery tank      Radiator pressure cap       Electric engine fans    5 13    The coolant level should be at or above the FULL  AN      COLD mark  If it isn   t  you may have a leak in the   CAUTION  radiator hoses  heater hoses  radiator  water pump or     An electric fan under the hood can start up even     somewhere else in the cooling system      when the engine is not running and can injure  you  Keep hands  clothing and tools away from   any underhood electric fan  A CAUTION      Heater and radiator hoses  and other engine   If the coolunt inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling  parts  can he very hot  Don t touch them  If you   don t do anything else until it cools down  do  you can be burned    Don t run the engine if there is a leak     you run   the engine  it could lose all coolant  That could   cause an engine fire  and you could be burned    Get any leak fixed before vou drive the vehicle        NOTICE     Engine damage from running vour engine  without coolant isn t covered by your warranty        If there seems to be no leak with the engine on  check to  see if the electric engine fans are running  If the engine  is overheating  both fans should be runnin
73. Coolant Message          PEL YI  Low Coolant Warning Light posisi  reastas ciii es 2 56  Low Washer Fluid Message       2257  Low Washer Fluid Warning Light                      2 64  Lubrication              MITT TIE 7 38  M  intenance Record                 Tear kere 3 44  Maintenance Schedule  Owner Checks and Services  2 2    0000s annm 7 37  Periodic Maintenance Inspections                   7 40  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants              724   NOME ce                           Trane ra      7 6  Schedule I Definition          Tod         Tiu su ssa                         RE                Schedule II Definition          7 5  Scheduled Maintenance Services                     773  Maintenance  Normal Replacement Paris              6 56  Maintenance  Underbody                                      Maintenance  When Trailer Towing                 2  4 36  Malfunction Indicator Lamp  Service Engine Soon       2 57  Manual Front Seat 0   6  da a aca Leg raria e        I 1  Manual Remote Control Mirror                      2 42  Maxifuse Reluy Center          VIDI eee Hyde 6 49       9 6         Methanol  In Fuel  1    caer mnm 6 5  Mirrors  Automatic Regrview                       hte 2 4   Comvert DUI Ede                                 Yi  Inside Manual Rearview       2 4   Manual Remote Control               2 42  Power Remote Control  oge        illie rnt 2 42                                                                  2 44  MLER tii        255 osa elu eu eiua 
74. DOO                 E von OPERE 6 10  Lamps On Reminder eec oon raro 2 38  Lane Change Indicator usages ro kie we reden 2 3   Larger Children  Safety Belt Use                     1 39  Leaving Your Vehicle   oee iar seb ee nra ere se   Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running         2 26  Light Sensor  Twilight Sentinel       0 2 0    000004  2 39  Lights  Air Bag Readiness joc  6 2            I  F0 2034  Anti Lock Brake System Warning                2 54  4 6         WEmIDER os scent od neck hacen en pete pie es oe 2 64  Brake System Warning                          2 53  Check Gages Warning        Te ieee hain SERA      2 64  Check Oil Level Warning                         2 00   Engine Coolant Temperature Warning              2 55  Engine Oil Pressure               onm ar xr 2 57  aa ea N E ETS E 2 536  Low Washer Fluid Warning                     2 64  Safety Belt Reminder                  2 52  Traction Off Wang  Like Shwe Sieh eee aces RUE REDI E  4 8  Eget isis usas c gai cala                       2 47  Loading Your Vehicle 1    rrr ni 4 29  Locks    DIOE r aA AEA AATA RE Koen i Pa erue c  Fuel Door             cre RU    des D ere en wa  Power Dot ss See rub      REA ee d E Ad se 2 4  Rear Door Seco         es eee eee         2 7  Steering Column ses tes beck                     yw es      7 39  Torque                     Ba ELA 0874  245        2 26  TIMER EAT        Deae eis sag fata a a la S                2 12  Loss of Conmal           5               E  Low 
75. H  When vou replace your thermostat  an AC    thermostat  is recommended            CC                                Power Steering Fluid    How To Check Power Steering Fluid    When the engine compartment 15 cool  unscrew the cap  and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag  Replace the cap  and completely tighten     Then remove the cap again  and look at the fluid level on the dipstick     The level should be at the FULL COLD mark  Add  enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark     A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem   Have the system inspected and repaired     med    TE    The power steering fluid reservoir on the L67 engine is  to the right of the supercharger and in front of the  transaxle dipstick     The power steering fluid reservoir on the L36 engine is  located below the alternator and behind the accessory  drive belt     What to Add    Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what  kind of fluid to use  See  Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants    in the Index     NOTICE     When adding power steering fluid or making a    complete fluid change  always use the proper  fluid  Failure to use the proper fluid can cause  leaks and damage hoses and seals                           6 35                   wc       Windshield Washer Fluid  What to Use  When you need windshield washer fluid  be sure to read  the manufacturer s instructions before use  If you will he  operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature  may fall below freezing  use a
76. HUD image is not clear it could be too bright   move the HUD dimmer control further downward  You  may need to clean the windshield and HUD lens     Your windshield is part of the HUD system  If you ever  have to have a new windshield  be sure to get one  designed for HUD     you don t  the HUD image may  look blurred and out of focus        Battery Warning Light    This light will come on  briefly when you start the  vehicle  as a check to show  you it is working  then it     should go out     If it stays on  or comes on while you are driving  you  may have a problem with the electrical charging system   It could indicate that you have a generator problem or  another electrical system problem  Have it checked right  away  Driving while this light is on could drain your  battery    If you must drive a short distance with the light on  be  certain to turn off all your accessories  such as the radio  and climate control system     Some clusters with gages do not have a battery warning  light  They have    CHECK GAGES warning to indicate  a problem  Vchicles with the supercharged engine also  have a similar battery warning light          2 63    Low Washer Fluid Warning Light  Option     This light will come on  when your windshield  washers are working and the    fluid container is less than     one third full     WASHER FLUID       Remember  driving without washer fluid can be  dangerous     bad mud splash can block your vision   You could collide with another vehicle  Check y
77. ION     When an air bag inflates  there is dust in the air     This dust could cause breathing problems for  people with a history of asthma or other  breathing trouble  To avoid this  everyone in the  vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so   If you have breathing problems but can   t get out     of the vehicle after an air bag inflates  then get  fresh air hv opening a window or door             In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag   windshields are broken by vehicle deformation   Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the  right front passenger air bag        The air bags are designed to inflate only once  After  they inflate  you ll need some new parts for your air  bag system  If you don t get them  the air bag system  won t be there to help protect you in another crash   A new system will include air bag modules and  possibly other parts  The service manual for your  vehicle covers the need to replace other parts        1 20                    Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic module   which records information about the air bag system   The module records information about the readiness  of the system  when the sensors are activated and  driver s safety belt usage at deployment    e Letonly qualified technicians work on your air bag  system  Improper service can mean that your air bag  system won t work properly  See your dealer for  SEVICE     NOTICE    If you damage the cover for the driver s or the  right front passe
78. If something goes wrong  your rig  could start to move  People can be injured  and both  your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged     But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill  here s  how to do it     I  Apply your regular brakes  but don t shift into  PARK  P  yet     2  Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels     3  When the wheel chocks are in place  release the  regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load     4  Keapply the regular brakes  Then apply your parking  brake  and then shift to PARK  P      5  Release the regular brakes     4 36    When You Are Ready to Leave After  Parking on a Hill        Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down  while you      Start your engine      Shift into a gear  and     Release the parking brake             Let up on the brake pedal     lad    Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks     m    Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks     Maintenance When Trailer Towing    Your vehicle will need service more often when you re  pulling a trailer  See the Maintenance Schedule for more  on this  Things that are especially important in trailer  operation are automatic transaxle fluid  don t overfill    engine oil  belts  cooling system  and brake adjustment   Each of these is covered in this manual  and the Index will  help you find them quickly  If  you re trailering  it s a good  idea to review these sections before you start your trip   Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts 
79. S  states  and  throughout Canada  the limit is 0 08 percent  In some  other countries it s even lower  The BAC limit for all  commercial drivers in the U S  is 0 04 percent     The        will be over 0 10 percent after three to six  drinks  in one hour   Of course  as we ve seen  it  depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks  and how  quickly the person drinks them     But the ability to drive 15 affected well below a BAC   of 0 10 percent  Research shows that the driving skills of  many people arc impaired at a BAC approaching   0 05 percent  and that the effects are worse at night  All  drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent   Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision  increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of   0 05 percent or above  A driver with a BAC level of  0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a  collision  At a BAC level of 0 10  percent  the chance of  this driver having a collision is twelve times greater  at a  level of 0 15 percent  the chance is twenty five times  greater     The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol  in one drink  No amount of coffee or number of cold    4 3    showers will speed that up     I ll be careful  isn t the  right answer  What if there s an emergency  a need to  take sudden action  as when a child darts into the street   A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able  to react quickly enough to avoid the collision     There s something else about drinking a
80. SORY or RUN  position    2  Turn the radio off    3  Press the   and 4 buttons together  Hold them down  until SEC shows in the display    4  Press MIN and  O00  will appear on the display    5  Press the MIN button again to make the last two  digits agree with your code    6  Press the HR button to make the first one or two  digits agree with your code     7  After you have confirmed that the code on the  display matches the secret code you previously set   press the AM FM button  The display will show        indicating that the radio is unsecured    If the code entered is incorrect  SEC will appear in the   display  The radio will remain secured until the correct   code is entered                           39 15    Cassette Tape and CD Errors    If  E  and    number appears in the radio display  an  error has occurred and the cassette or compact disc  cannot play temporarily     If the error occurred while trying to play a cassette tape     the following conditions may have caused the error         The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player  cannot turn the hubs of the cassette tape     E10    may  be displayed  Hold the cassette with the open end  down and try turning the right hub  counter clockwise with a pencil  Flip the tape over  and repeat  If the hubs do not turn easily  your  cassette tape may be damaged and should not be  used in the cassette player  Try a new tape to make  sure that your cassette player is working properly         The cassette tape is bro
81. Tires should be inspected every 6 000 to 8 000 miles   10 QOO te 13 000 km  for any signs of unusual wear  If  unusual wear is present  rotate your tires      soon as  possible and check wheel alignment  Also check for  damaged tires or wheels  See  When it s Time for New  Tires  and  Wheel Replacement  later in this section for  more information     The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more  uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle  The first  rotation is the most important  See  Scheduled  Maintenance Services  in the Index for scheduled  rotation intervals        When rotating your tires  always use the correct rotation  pattern shown here     Don t include the compact spare tire in your tire  rotation     After the tires have been rotated  adjust the front and  rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire  Loading  Information label  Make certain that all wheel nuts are  properly tightened  See  Wheel Nut Torque  in the  Index           N CAUTION       Rust or dirt on a wheel  or on the parts to which  it is fastened  can make wheel nuts become loose  after a time  The wheel could come off and cause  an accident  When you change    wheel  remove  any rust or dirt from places where the wheel  attaches to the vehicle  In an emergency  you can  use    cloth or a paper towel to do this  but be  sure to use    scraper      wire brush later  if you  need to  to get all the rust or dirt off   See     Changing a Flat Tire    in the Index                          6 35  
82. a  trailer  For example  if the trailer is too heavy  the  brakes may not work well    or even at all  You  and your passengers could be seriously injured   Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the  steps in this section  Ask your Pontiac dealer for  advice and information about towing a trailer    NOTICE   Fulling a trailer improperly ean damage your  vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by  your warranty  To pull a trailer correctly  follow  the advice in this part  and see your Pontiac  dealer for important information about towing a  trailer with your vehicle        Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the  SE package and proper trailer towing equipment  Do mor  tow a trailer with the SSE package  To identify what the  vehicle trailering capacity 15 for your vehicle  you  should read the information in  Weight of the Trailer     that appears later in this section  But trailering is  different than just driving vour vehicle      itself   Trailering means changes in handling  durability  and  fuel economy  Successful  safe trailering takes correct  equipment  and it has to be used properly    That s the reason for this part  In it are many  time tested  important trailering tips and safety rules   Many of these are important for your safety and that of  your passengers  So please read this section carefully  before you pull a trailer     Load pulling components such as the engine  transaxle   wheel assemblies  and tires are forced to wor
83. a corrosive environment     Starter Switch     N CAUTION     When you are doing this check  the vehicle could  move suddenly  If it does  you or others could be  injured  Follow the steps below                Before you start  be sure you have enough room  around the vehicle               Firmly apply both the parking brake  see  Parking  Brake  in the Index if necessary  and the regular  brake     NOTE  Do not use the accelerator pedal  and be  ready to turn off the            immediately if it starts    3  Try to start the engine in each gear  The starter  should work only in PARK  P  or NEUTRAL        If  the starter works in any other position  your vehicle  needs service        Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock    BTSI         CAUTION     When you are doing this check  the vehicle could    move suddenly  If it does  vou ar others could be  injured  Follow the steps below           Before you start  be sure you have enough room  around the vehicle  It should be parked on a level  surface    2  Firmly apply the parking brake  see  Parking Brake   in the Index if necessary     NOTE  Be ready to apply the regular brake  immediately if the vehicle begins to move    3  With the engine off  turn the key to the RUN  position  but don t start the engine  Without applying  the regular brake  try to move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  with narmal effort  If the shift lever  moves out of PARK       your vehicle s BTSI needs  service     Steering Column Lock    While parked  and with
84. acement  Used              rA Edi RE 6 39  Windows  PUWET 24 2 4  hae tym                       Windshield Washer Fluid                      2 33  6 26  Windsineld Washers      caeci                   2 34  Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement                 6732  Windshield Wiper  Circuit Breaker                    6 49  Wi  dsiuela             ge yee oa ee      ICI 2 32  Ver DOE rr          ada aA d e ira d a a EE    4 24  Wiring  Heidi oce  sr ER nb Een e 6 49  Wicker Towing                                  wa ka n             wd 5 6    9 11    NOTES          1995       a um  e    
85. act the BBB at any time  The BBB will attempt  to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary  between you and Pontiac  If this mediation is  unsuccessful  an informal hearing will be scheduled  where eligible customers may present their case     an  impartial third party arbitrator     The arbitrator will make a decision which you may  accept or reject  If you accept the decision  GM will be  bound by that decision  The entire dispute resolution  procedure should ordinarily take about forty days from  the time you      a claim until a decision 15 made     Some state laws may require you to use this program  before filing a claim with a state run arhitration program  or in the courts  For further information  contact the  BBB at 1 800 955 5100 or the Pontiac Customer  Assistance Center at 1 800 PM CARES     REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  TO THE UNITED STATES  GOVERNMENT    If you believe that your vehicle has    defect which could  cause a crash or could cause injury or death  you should  immediately inform the National Highway Traffic  Safety Administration  NHTSA   in addition to  notifying General Motors     If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may open an  investigation  and if it finds that a safety defect exists in  a group of vehicles  it may order a recall and remedy  campaign  However  NHTSA cannot become involved  in individual problems between vou  your dealer  or  General Motors     To contact NHTSA  you may either call the Auto Safety  Hotline toll free at 1 
86. ady speed  Wait to  accelerate until you are out of the curve  and then  accelerate gently into the straightaway     Steering in Emergencies    There are times when steering can be more effective  than braking  For example  vou come over a hill and  find a truck stopped in your lane  or a car suddenly pulls  out from nowhere  or a child darts out from berween  parked cars and stops right in front of you  You can  avoid these problems by braking    if you can stop in          But sometimes you can t  there isn t room  That s  the time for evasive action    steering around the  problem     Your Pontiac can perform very well in emergencies like  these  First apply your brakes  It is better to remove as  much speed as you can from a possible collision  Then  steer around the problem  to the left or right depending  on the space available     An emergency like this requires close attention and a  quick decision  If you are holding the steering wheel at  the recommended 9 and 3 o clock positions  you can  turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing  either hand  But vou have to act fast  steer quickly  and  just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have  avoided the object        The fact that such emergency situations        always  possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at  all times and wear safety belts properly        4 10                  Off Road Recovery    You may find sometime that your right wheels have  dropped off the edge of a road on
87. again       open fully  The sunshade can  also be opened by hand        Press and hold the control switch forward to close the  glass panel  The sunshade can only be closed by hand   When the sunroof is in the fully closed position  press    the control switch forward to the vent position  Open the  sunshade by hand     Press the switch rearward to close the rear vent     Storage Armrest  Option        Press the button at the front edge to open the armrest  storage area for cassette tapes  gloves  etc  A cup holder  flips forward for use        Door Cup Holder Rear Storage Compartment        Lift the rear of the armrest to reveal the storage space        The front doors provide space for holding a cup or soft    ark  Pull down the interior door to access the trunk for    storing long objects       2 46                M                            Ashtrays  Lift the cover to reveal the front ashtray   To clean the ashtray  lift it out by pulling on the snuffer     On models without    console  there s an ashtray cup  holder under the instrument panel  To clean the ashtray   lift it out by pulling up on the tabs on either side  It  snaps back into place     To open the rear ashtrays  lift the cover     NOTICE     Don t put papers and other things that burn into      your ashtrays  If you do  cigarettes or other    smoking materials could set them on fire   causing damage        Lighters    To use a lighter  just push the center in all the way and  let it go  When it is ready the
88. aintenance Record    After the scheduled services are performed  record the  date  odometer reading and who performed the service  in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval   Any additional information from  Owner Checks and  Services  or  Periodic Maintenance  can be added on  the following record pages  Also  you should retain all  maintenance receipts  Your owner information portfolio  is    convenient place to store them     7 43       Section 8 Customer Assistance Information    Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you  need assistance  This section also tells you how to obtain  service publications and how to report any safety  delects     This section includes information       Customer  Satisfaction Procedure  Customer Assistance for  Hearing or Speech Impaired  BBB Auto  Line Alternative Dispute Resolution Program   Reporting Safety Defects  Roadside Assistance  and  Service and Owner Publications     Customer Satisfaction Procedure    Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your  dealer and Pontiac  Normally  any concern with the sales  transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be  resolved by your dealer s Sales or Service Departments   Sometimes  however  despite the best intentions of all  concerned  misunderstandings can occur  If your  concern has not been resolved to vour satisfaction  the  following steps should be taken     STEP ONE    Discuss your concern with a member of  dealership management  Normally  concerns can 
89. and bolts  are tight        Section 5 Problems on the Road             Here you ll find what to do about some problems that  can occur on the road     Hazard Warning Flashers             Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others  They  also let police know you have a problem  Your front and  rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off     Press the button in to make  your front and rear turn  signal lamps flash on and  aff     Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what  position your key is in  and even if the key isn t in        To turn off the flashers  pull  out on the collar     When thc hazard warning  Hashers are on  vour turn  signals won t work        Other Warning Devices    If you carry reflective triangles  you can set one up at  the side of the road about 300 feet   100 m  hehind your  vehicle     Jump Starting    If your battery has run down  you may want to use  another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your  Pontiac  But please follow the steps below to do it  safely     5 2         CAUTION     Batteries can hurt you  They can be dangerous  because        They contain acid that can burn you           They contain gas that can explode or ignite       They contain enough electricity to burn   you   If you don   t follow these steps exactly  some or all  of these things can hurt you        NOTICE     Remember that ignoring these steps could result  in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn t be    covered by your warranty     Trying to start
90. ard stop  the light may come on for          moment  This is normal  NOTICE   Clusters with gages use the CHECK GAGES warning Damage to your engine from neglected oil  light to alert you of a potential oil pressure problem  problems can be costly and is not covered by your    warranty        To ae    Oil Pressure Gage  Option     The oi  pressure gage shows  the engine oi  pressure in  psi  pounds per square inch   when the engine is running   Canadian vehicles indicate  pressure in kPa   kiloPascals         Oil pressure may vary with engine speed  outside  temperature and oil viscosity  but readings above the red  warning zone indicate the normal operating range     A reading in the red zone may be caused by     dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low  oil pressure  The CHECK GAGES light will go on and a  warning chime will sound  if you have this option   Driving your vehicle with low oil pressure can cause  extensive engine damage          CAUTION     Don t keep driving if the oil pressure is low  If  you do  your engine ean become so hot that it  catches fire  You or others could be burned   Check your oil as soon as possible and have your  vehicle serviced     NOTICE     Damage to vour engine from neglected oil  problems can be costly and is not covered by your  warranty               2 59    Check Oil Level Warning Light  Option     This light indicates when     the engine oil level is 1 to   1 1 2 quarts  0 95 L to   1 4 L  low  It will go on for  one to
91. are on  properly  Then just pull the hood down and close it  firmly     Underhood Lamp    Your parking lamps or headlamps must be on for the  underhood lamp to function when you open the hood        6 10        Envine Accessory Belt       The 3800  1 36  engine uses an engine accessory belt   This diagram shows the features connected by the belt  routing  See  Maintenance Schedule  in the Index for  when to check the belt     A  Power Steering D  Crank  B  Alternator E  Coolant Pump  C  Air Conditioning F  Tensioner    3800 Supercharged  L67  Engine   Option    Your Bonneville may have a 3800 Supercharged engine   The Supercharger is a device which is designed to pump  more air into the engine than it would normally use   This air mixed with fuel  creates increased engine  power  Since the Supercharger is a pump and is driven  from an engine accessory drive belt  increased pressure  is available at all driving conditions     The                  control module  PCM   works with a  vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure  required during specific driving conditions  When this  increased pressure or boost is not desired  such as during  idling and light throttle cruising  the excess air that the  Supercharger is pumping 15 routed through a bypass    All of these controls  working together provide high  performance character and fuel efficiency in the    3800 V6 Supercharged engine     The power steering pump uses a remote reservoir  mounted on the throttle and cruise 
92. ari 2 10                                   BOSE              GUN eee ae   4 11  Performance Shifting           lilio siena 2 22  Periodic Maintenance Inspections                   T 4  Power Antenna Mast Care o e eae etetean       20  Power Deor Locke ia ies does                     2 4  Power Outlet  Accessory              Fa A EET AER 2 48  Power Remote Control Mitros                      2 47  dis de       D DEN 1 2  Power                                                             4 9  Power Steering Fluid              enn   6 25   JODIE a oe pie US sat    20 25                                                 6 25  POW WW                           veg          abe          2 29  Power  Retained Accessory             ners a E 2 15  Pregnancy  Use of Safety Belts                      1 22  Problems on the Road su teare ee rr                 5 1  Publications  Service and Owner                      8 7  Radiator COT EO RE IRIE ER ET MRE RR TIE 5 17  Radiator Pressure              nn 6 24  Radio Reception  Understanding                     a  18         9 7    Radios  ANUPFMESIEIBO  eaaa ERA eent ae         AM FM Stereo Radios with Cassette                3 9  AM FM Stereo Radios with Compact Dise Player    3 12  En  EVENS     ee eere et rax erai 4 16  Reading Lamps         2 40  BEES      Fares  ore        cR py AEN M EE Ee 2 40  Rear Door Security Ld race sare            RE Roca x 2 7  Rear Seat Passengers         CPU Ure nei e ice ar gis EDU 1 24  Rear Storage Compartment 
93. arking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first      ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY    ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY             a N         99 000 Miles  165 000 km     Lj Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service     100 000 Miles  166 000 km     Cl Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  more of these conditions     In heavy city traffic where the outside  temperature regularly reaches 90 F   32  C  or higher    In hilly or mountainous terrain    When doing frequent trailer towing   Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service     If you do net use your vehicle under any of  these conditions  the fluid        filter do not  require changing                 Maintenance Schedule II       The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles   166 000 km  should be performed after 100 000 miles     166 000 km  at the same intervals     Footnotes      The U S  Environmental Protection Agency or the  California Air Resources Board has determined that the  failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify  the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the  completion of vehicle useful life  We  however  urge that  all recommended maintenance services be performed at  the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded        7 500 Miles  12 500 km         Change engine oil a
94. arts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol  and it will burn if the engine parts are hot  enough  Don t spill coolant on a hot engine                    When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at  FULL COLD  start your vehicle     If the overheat warning continues  there s one more  thing you can try  You can add the proper coolant mix  directly to the radiator but be sure the cooling system is  coal before you do it           How to        Coolant to the Radiator    2  Then keep turning the  pressure cap  but now  push down as you tum  it  Remove the pressure  cap     feet       Sy       4       3  Fill the radiator with the  proper mix  up to the  base of the filler neck        You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the  cooling system  including the radiator pressure cap  and upper radiator hose  15 no longer hot  Turn the  pressure cap slowly to the left until it first stops    Don t press down while turning the pressure cap    If you hear    hiss  wait for that to stop  A hiss means  there 15 still some pressure left           5 17    ie           d     1                            i aoe      WEAH      4  Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL 5  Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank  but  COLD mark  leave the radiator pressure cap off     F              il        5 E Li da       i dies  imm SPs                                          mL E   z  X       5d e a      6     wal       Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the  upper 
95. as shown    Su ON                  NOTICE     Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your    vehicle as well as the tires  If you spin the wheels  too fast while shifting your transaxle back and  forth  you can destroy your transaxle        For information about using tire chains on your vehicle   see  Tire Chains  in the Index     Rocking your vehicle to get it out    First  turn your steering wheel left and right  That will  clear the area around your front wheels  If your vehicle  has traction control  you should turn the system off   See     Traction Control System    in the Index   Then shift  back and forth between REVERSE  R  and a forward  pear  spinning the wheels as little as possible  Release  the accelerator pedal while you shift  and press lightly  on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear  If  that doesn t get you out after a few tries  you may need  to be towed out  If you do need to be towed out  see   Towing Your Pontiac  in the Index     NOTES       Y Section 6 Service and Appearance Care       Here you will find information about the care of your  Pontiac  This section begins with service and fuel  information  and then it shows how to check important  fluid and lubricant levels  There is also technical  information about your vehicle  and    part devoted to its  appearance care     Service    Your Pontiac dealer knows vour vehicle best and wants  you to be happy with it  We hope vou ll go to your  dealer for all vour service needs  You ll g
96. ates    Pontiac Division   Customer Assistance Center  One Pontiac Plaza   Pontiac  MI 48340 2952    8 2    Canada    General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Assistance Centre 163 005  1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH 8P7    Refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance  Information booklet for addresses of Canadian and GM  Overseas offices     When contacting Pontiac  please remember that your  concern will likely be resolved in the dealership  using  the dealership s facilities  equipment and personnel   That is why we suggest vou follow Step One first if you  have    concern      Customer Assistance for the Hearing  or Speech Impaired  TDD     To assist customers who have hearing difficulties   Pontiac has installed special TDD  Telecommunication  Devices for the Deaf  equipment at its Customer  Assistance Center  Any hearing or speech impaired  customer who has access         TDD or a conventional  teletypewriter  TT Y  can communicate with Pontiac by  dialing  1 800 TDD PONT   TDD users in Canada can  dial 1 800 263 3830         GM Participation in BBB AUTO  LINE   Alternative Dispute  Resolution Program      This program may not be available in all states   depending on state law  Canadian owners refer to your  Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet   General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility  limitations and or to discontinue its participation in this  program     Both Pontiac and your Pontiac dealer are committed to  making sure y
97. au      a      dera   6 4  Na  Be S a      REN E ERR      E                2 43              POSITION zur ke e vao laca drea dide  E mad 2 20  New Vehicle Break In               2 13  DUEB VISIT uae dare s EE evita ace                                      4 15  amr A               Ere Ure SP    I E rh PIER 2 30   Odometer  Tamper fat CL 2 50  CHiametar  Tm eho Dea Re aa eu   n uai kia a a mia aia 2 30  CROT Recovery        ice aces acer ede geet ae  4 1        Pressure Gage                        ee desea          2 59  Oil  Engine                        6 12  Oll  Superchatger pce ete wee nea             hdi   6 18  Ordenng  Owner Publi  ations     20  eee cree rr RIS 8 7  Service Bulletins                       8 7  Service Manuals                      tmn P ESCAS 8 7  Dedi ll  VI           a axe ora das 2 20           TES oo        rnit EIER     gi Fs  Owner Checks and Services        ee hann T 37  Owner Publications  Ordering             8 7    Paim SPOMENE Loco ee err EET ms 6 46    Park  P   Shifting  Into      ele veya eae 7 7      Park  P   Shifting Out of                   er m         PRk  PPREPOHHON      EE Ro 2 19  Parking Bake  eee rore passe pa Radon 2 23  ordin a BESI oan VES 4 3   PEE ODE                         Rx doces rd ae ROCK a ele a af      e  Parking  AENDE orc rcc erre rhe HEY n 2 8  Parking  On Hills While Towing a Trailer              4 36  Parking  Over Things That Burn                     2 21  PASSO EE I                            Rara Wal die a 
98. ays in the RUN position when the engine is  running  But even when the engine is not running  you  can use RUN to operate your electrical power  accessories  and to display some instrument panel  warning lights    START  E   Starts the engine  When the engine starts   release the key  The ignition switch will return to RUN  for normal driving    Note that even if the engine is not running  the positions  ACCESSORY and RUN are ON positions that allow  you to operate your electrical accessories  such as the  radio    Key Reminder Warning  If you leave your key in the  ignition  in the OFF position  you will hear a warning  tone when you open the driver s door     04                                                                                Retained Accessory Power  If you have this option     after you turn your ignition off and even remove the key     you will still have electrical power to such accessories  as the radio and power windows for up to ten minutes   But if you open a door  power is turned off     NOTICE     If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can t  turn it  be sure it is all the way in  If it is  then  turn the steering wheel left and right while you    turn the key hard  But turn the key only with  your hand  Using    tool to force it could break  the key or the ignition switch  If none of this  works  then your vehicle needs service     Starting Your Engine    Move your shift lever to PARK  P  or NEUTRAL        Your engine won t start in any other posit
99. be  quickly resolved at that level  If the matter has already  been reviewed with the Sales  Service  or Parts Manager   contact the owner of the dealership or the General  Manager     STEP TWO    If after contacting a member of  dealership management  it appears your concern cannot  be resolved by the dealership without further help   contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by  calling 1 800 PM CARES  In Canada  contact GM of  Canada Customer Assistance Center in Oshawa by  calling 1 800 263 3777  English  or 1 800 263 7854   French      In Mexico  call  525  254 3777  In Puerto Rico  call      800 496 9992  English  or 1 800 496 9993   Spanish   In the U S  Virgin Islands  call  1 800 496 9904  In other overseas locations  contact  GM North American Export Sales in Canada by calling  1 905 644 4112                          For prompt assistance  please have the following   information available to give the Customer Assistance   Representative       Your name  address  home and business telephone  numbers       Vehicle Identification Number  This is available  from the vehicle registration or title  or the plate at  the left top of the instrument panel and visible  through the windshield        Dealership name and location      Vehicle delivery date and present mileage      Nature of concern   We encourage you to call the toll free number listed    previously in order to give your inquiry prompt attention     However  if you wish to write Pontiac  write to   United St
100. by pushing the SET button     2 36      To Reduce Speed While Using Cruise  Control    There are two ways to reduce your speed while using  cruise control        Push in the button at the end of the lever until vou  reach the lower speed you want  then release it        To slow down in very small amounts  push the  button for less than half a second  Each time you do  this  you ll go 1 mph  1 6 km h  slower     Passing Another Vehicle While Using  Cruise Control    Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed  When  you take your foot off the pedal  your vehicle will slow  down to the cruise control speed you set earlier     Using Cruise Control on Hills    How well your cruise control will work on hills depends  upon your speed  load  and the steepness of the hills  When  going up steep hills  you may have to step on the  accelerator pedal to maintain your speed  When going  downhill  you may have to brake or shift to    lower gear to  keep your speed down  Of course  applying the brake takes  you out of eruise control  Many drivers find this to be too  much trouble and don t use cruise control on steep hills        To Get Qut of Cruise Control  There are two ways to turn off the cruise control   e Step lightly on the brake pedal  OR       Move the cruise switch to OFF     Cruise Control with Traction Control  Activated    When the Traction Control System is turned on and  becomes activated by sensors  it will automatically turn  off the cruise control  See    Traction C
101. can be too heavy     It depends on how you plan to use your rig  For  example  speed  altitude  road grades  outside  temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a  trailer are all important  And  it can also depend on any  special equipment that you have on your vehicle     You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or  advice  or you can write us at     Customer Assistance Center  Pontiac Division  One Pontiac Plaza  Pontiac  MI 48340 2952  In Canada  write to     General Motors of Canada Limited  Customer Assistance Center   1908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH 8P7    4 31    Weight of the Trailer Tongue    The tongue load      of any trailer is an important  weight to measure because it affects the total capacity  weight of your vehicle  The capacity weight includes the  curb weight of the vehicle  any cargo you may carry in  it  and the people who will be riding in the vehicle  And  if you will tow a trailer  you must subtract the tongue  load from your vehicle s capacity weight because your  vehicle will be carrying that weight  too  See  Loading  Your Vehicle  in the Index for more information about  your vehicle s maximum load capacity        4 32    If you re using a  dead weight  hitch  the trailer tongue   A  should weigh 10  of the total loaded trailer weight   B   If you have a  weight distributing  hitch  the trailer  tongue  A  should weigh 12  of the total loaded trailer  weight  B     After you ve loaded your trailer  weigh the t
102. ch or too little fluid can damage your  transaxle  Too much can mean that some of the    fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts  or exhaust system parts  starting a fire  Be sure to  get an accurate reading if you check your  transaxle fluid     6 20       Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle  fluid level if you have been driving     e When outside temperatures are above 90  F  32  C        Athigh speed for quite a while        In heavy traffic    especially in hot weather    e While pulling a trailer     To get the right reading  the fluid should be at normal  operating temperature  which is 180 F to 200 F  82 C  to 93  C     Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles  24 km   when outside temperatures are above 50  F  10  C   If it s  colder than 50 F  10  C   you may have to drive longer     To check the fluid level   1  Park your vehicle on a level place  Keep the engine  running    2     With the parking brake applied  place the shift lever  in PARK  P     With your foot on the brake pedal  move the shift  lever through each gear range  pausing for about  three seconds in each range  Then  position the shift  lever in PARK  P     4  Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes     La       Then  without shutting off the engine  follow these 4  Check both sides of the dipstick  and read the lower  steps  level  The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area     2 4  If the fluid level is in the acceptable range  push the   
103. child or others could be badly injured or even  killed     They could operate power windows or other  controls or even make the vehicle move  If they  turned the ignition to      and moved the shift  lever out of PARK  P   that would release the  parking brake  Don t leave the keys in a vehicle  with voung children              2 2      The ignition keys are for the    ignition only     The door keys are for the      doors and all other locks     When a new Bonneville is delivered  the dealer removes  the plugs from the keys  and gives them to the first  owner  However  the ignition key may not have a plug   If the ignition key doesn t have a plug  it will have a  har coded key tag    Each plug or tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or  a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys  Keep the  plugs or the tags in a safe place  If you lose your keys   you ll be able to have new ones made easily using these  plugs or the tag  If your ignition keys don t have plugs  or the tag  go to your Pontiac dealer for the correct key  code if vou need a new ignition key     There are 15 alternative PASS Key  blanks  to help  discourage theft  Your dealer can help determine which  blank you need     NOTICE     Your Pontiac has    number of new features that  can help prevent theft  But you can have a lot of  trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock    your keys inside  You may even have to damage  your vehicle to get in  So be sure you have extra  keys        Door Locks    
104. cing  Use SEEK or the TUNE  knob to change the radio station during forward   EJECT  Press EJECT to remove the cassette tape   EJECT will operate with the ignition off    If E and a number appears on the display at any time  an  error has occurred  See    Cassette Tape and CD Errors     later in this section     3 12    AM FM Stereo Radios with Compact Disc  Player             The radio portion of these sound systems operates the  same as the two previously explained    Compact Disc Player  Option     You may use full size or the smaller 8       3 2 in    compact discs    No adaptor is required for the smaller compact discs   With the radio on  insert a disc with the label side up   The CD symbol will appear in the lower left corner of  the display  Wait a few seconds and the disc should  begin to play     If E and    number appears on the display at any time  an  error has occurred  See  Cassette Tape and CD Errors   later in this section     Compact Disc Player Control Features   CD PLAY  If you have a disc loaded and the radio is    playing  press CD PLAY to play your disc  The disc will    begin playing from the track where it last stopped  To    return to the radio while a disc is playing  press AM FM     The disc will remain safely inside the radio for future  listening    RECALL  Press RECALL to see which track is  playing  Press it again  within five seconds  to display  how long your selection has been playing     PREY  While playing a compact disc  press PREV   prev
105. ck the fuel filler  doar  you may use the outside door key lock  the inside  power door lock button  or the Remote Keyless Entry  key chain transmitter  To unlock the fuel door  unlock all  doors  If the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter 15 used   the unlock button must be pressed twice     Filling Your Tank       The cap is behind a hinged door on the left side of your  vehicle          CAUTION     Gasoline vapor is highly flammable  It burns  violently  and that can cause very bad injuries   Don t smoke if you re near gasoline or refueling  vour vehicle  Keep sparks  flames  and smoking  materials away from gasoline                  While refueling  hang the cap inside the fuel door          take off the cap  turn it slowly to the lett   counterclock wise             When you put the cap back on  turn it to the right until  IN CAUTION  you hear at least three clicks       If you get gasoline on yourself and then  something ignites it  you could be badly burned   Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the    NOTICE   If you need a new cap  be sure to get the right  type  Your dealer can get one for you  If you get    fuel filler cap too quickly  This spray can happen  if your tank is nearly full  and is more likely in  hot weather  Open the fuel filler cap slowly and  wait for any   hiss  noise to stop  Then unscrew  the cap all the way     the wrong type  it may not fit or have proper  venting  and your fuel tank and emissions system    might be damaged        Be careful 
106. cks  chafing   etc  Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for  surface condition  Also inspect drum brake linings for  wear and cracks  Inspect other brake parts  including  drums  wheel cylinders  calipers  parking brake  etc   Check parking brake adjustment  You may need to have  your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits  or conditions result in frequent braking        Part D  Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants    NOTE  Fluids and lubricants identified below by name   part number or specification may be obtained from your  OM dealer     USAGE    Engine              FLUID LUBRICANT  Engine oil with the American  Petroleum Institute Certified For     Gasoline Engines  Starburst   symbol of the proper viscosity  To  determine the preferred viscosity     for your vehicle s engine  see   Engine Oil  in the Index                             50 50 mixture of water  pre ferably  distilled  and good quality  ethylene glycol base antifreeze   GM Part No  1052753 or     equivalent  conforming to GM  Specification 1825M or approved  recycled coolant conforming to    GM Specification 1825M     Engine Coolant          7 41    USAGE           Part No  363462  or equivalent    Coolant  Supplement    Hydraulic Brake  System      Parking Brake  Guides      Power Steering    System      Automatic  Transaxle    Key Lock  Cylinders    7 42    FLUID LUBRICANT    with a complete flush and refill   Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid   GM Part No  1052535 or  equivalent DOT 3 brake fl
107. cle  Damage can occur from vehicle to  ground or vehicle to wheel lift equipment  To    help avoid damage  install a towing dolly and  raise vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained  between the ground and or wheel lift equipment   Do not attach winch cables or     hooks to  suspension components when using car carrier  equipment  Always use T hooks inserted in the  T hook slots        Use whecl lift      car carrier equipment  Additional  ramping may be required for the car carrier equipment   Use safety chains and wheel straps        5 10      Rear Towing Hookups  All   TOW LIMITS    55 MPH and 500 Miles    Attach T hook chains in the slotted holes in the floor  pan support rails on both sides  just ahead of the rear  wheels    Position the lower sling crossbar directly under the rear  bumper     Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end  of each lower control arm                                               M                SSE       Engine Overheating    You will find a coolant temperature gage or the warning  light about a hot engine on your Pontiac s instrument  panel  See    Coolant Temperature Gage  and    Coolant  Temperature Warning Light  in the Index     If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine a    CAUTION   Continued     from the engine if you see Gr hear Sd  coming  from it  Just turn it off and get everyone away from   the vehicle until it cools down  Wait until there is no    sign of steam or coolant before opening the hood   Ifyou keep driving w
108. code     Press AM FM and this time the display will show  SEC  indicating that your radio is secure        The THEFTLOCK indicator light located below the  TUNE knob will flash when the ignition is off     Anytime THEFTLOCK is activated and the battery   power is removed  the radio will display LOC    When unlocking THEFTLOCK after a power loss  enter   vour secret code as follows  Pause no more than 15   seconds between steps    1  LOC will appear when the ignition is on    2  Press MIN and  000  will appear on the display    3  Press the MIN button again to make the last rwo  digits appear on the display    4  Press the HR button to make the first one or two  digits agree with your code    5  After you have confirmed that the code in the display  matches the secret code you have written down   press AM FM  SEC will appear in the display  indicating that the radio is now operable and secure    If the code entered to unlock THEFTLOCK 15 incorrect    the radio will remain locked  After eight unsuccessful   attempts to unlock the radio  the display will show    InOP   inoperative     At this point you will need to keep the ignition on for   one hour before you may attempt to enter another code     After three more unsuccessful attempts to unlock the   radio  the display will show  InOP   inoperative     If you forget your code or cannot unlock the radio    contact your Pontiac dealer for assistance    To disable THEFTLOCK  follow these steps    1  Turn the ignition to the ACCES
109. control cable bracket   See  Maintenance Schedule  in the Index for when you  should check the fluid                     6 11    Engine Accessory Belt       1  Front Belt C  Crank    2  Back Belt D  Supercharger  A  Alternator E  Coolant Pump  B  Power Steering F  Air Conditioning    The Supercharged 3800 engine uses two accessory drive  belts  One belt drives the generator and the power  steering pump  The second belt drives the supercharger     6 12  lt         coolant pump and air conditioning compressor  Each  belt has its own tensioner and idler pulley    See  Maintenance Schedule  in the Index for when to  check the accessory drive belts and Supercharger oil  level  Have your dealer check the oil level in the  Supercharger     Engine Oil    CHECK OIL    LEVEL    If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light on the instrument  panel comes on  it means you need to check your engine  ail level right away  For more information  see    Check  Oil Level Light  in the Index  You should check your  engine oil level regularly  this 15 an added reminder     It s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you  vet fuel  In order to get an accurate reading  the oil must  be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground     The engine oil dipstick  is directly behind the  engine fan area        Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes to  drain back into the oil pan  If you don t  the oil dipstick  might not show the actual level     To Check Engine Oil  Pull out the dipstick and clean
110. d    Spare    on  the chart on the next page     Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse  If the  band is broken or melted  replace the fuse  Be sure you  replace a bad fuse with a new one of the correct size     When finished  replace the cover and pinch the release  levers again to unlock the panel  Press it back up into  place     Maxifuse Relay Center    To check the fuses in this underhood fuse center  tum  the two knobs 1 4 turn counterclockwise and loosen the  metal wing nut on the passenger side of the cover  Then  remove the cover  The inside of the cover has    chart    that explains the features and controls governed by each  fuse and relay     Headlamp Wiring    The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in  the lamp switch  An electrical overload will cause the  lamps to go on and off  or in some cases to remain off  If  this happens  have your headlamp system checked right  away     Windshield Wipers    The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit  breaker and    fuse  If the motor overheats due to heavy  snow  etc   the wiper will stop until the motor cools  If  the overload is caused by some electrical problem  have  it fixed     Power Windows and Other Power Options    Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power  windows and other power accessories  When the current  load is too heavy  the circuit breaker opens and closes   protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed          6 49    Left Side Fuse Panel  Located to t
111. d in the acceleration skid too  much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin        cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off  the accelerator pedal     If you have the traction control system  remember  It  helps avoid only the acceleration skid        If you do not have traction control  or if the system is  off  then an acceleration skid is also best handled by  easing your foot off the accelerator pedal     If your vehicle starts to slide  ease your foot off the  accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the  vehicle to go  If you start steering quickly enough  your  vehicle may straighten out  Always be ready for     second skid if it occurs     Of course  traction is reduced when water  snow  ice   gravel  or other material 15 on the road  For safety  you ll  want to slow down and adjust your driving to these  conditions  It is important to slow down on slippery  surfaces hecause stopping distance will be longer and  vehicle control more limited     While driving on a surface with reduced traction  try your  best to avoid sudden steering  acceleration  or braking   including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear    Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide  You  may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle  is skidding  Learn to recognize warning clues    such as  enough water  ice or packed snow on the road to make a   mirrored surface     and slow down when you have   any doubt     Remember  Anv anti lock brake sys
112. d outside temperatures  when little  heating or cooling is needed  use the vent setting  Air  will flow through the middle instrament panel outlets        Use the air outlets to adjust and direct the air flow   Adjust the temperature control and fan control as  desired  The air conditioning compressor is not working  when vent is selected        ef Heat  This setting directs warmed air through the  heater ducts toward the floor  Adjust the fan speed and  the temperature control for your comfort  Some warm  air is diverted to the windshield to minimize fogging     wy       Defog  This setting directs air to the heater ducts  and toward the windshield  Use defog on cool  humid  days to keep the windshield and side windows clear   Adjust the fan speed and temperature for your comfort     um Defrost  This setting directs most of the air toward  the windshield  Use defrost when you want to remove  fog or ice from the windshield  Adjust the temperature  control toward warm and the fan control toward high   Defrost will work better if heavy snow and ice are  cleared away from the hood  windshield and the air inlet  area between the hood and windshield           Rear Window Defog   Option   The lines you see  on the rear window warm  the glass  Press the button to  start warming your window   A light will glow in the  switch while the defogger is  working     After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself or pressing the  button during the heating cycle will also turn it off  If  you ne
113. d steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first         Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     SERVICED BY        Maintenance Schedule I  24 000 Miles  40 000 km  27 000 Miles  45 000     Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first      C  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service         ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 10                  30 000 Miles  50 000 km     C  Change engine oil and filter  or every   Replace spark plugs  An Emission Control  s         3 months  whichever occurs first   Service   An Emission Control Service  C  Inspect spark plug wires  An Emission   C  Lubricate the suspension and steering Control Service  t  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking      Replace air cleaner filter  Replace filter  brake cable guides and underbody contact more often under dusty conditions   points and linkage  or every 6 months  An Emission Control Service   whichever occurs first   _          a      ico       L  Inspect f
114. dealer s service  department or another qualified service center should  perform      Part D  Recommended Fluids and Lubricants    list    some products GM recommends to help keep your  vehicle properly maintained  These products  or their  equivalents  should be used whether you do the work  yourself or have it done      Part E  Maintenance Record  provides a place for  you to record the maintenance performed on your  vehicle  Whenever any maintenance 15 performed  be  sure to write it down in this part  This will help vou  determine when your next maintenance should be done   In addition  it is    good idea to keep your maintenance  receipts  They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for                          Part A  Scheduled Maintenance  Services    Using Your Maintenance Schedule    We at General Motors want to help you keep your  vehicle in good working condition  But we don t know  exactly how you ll drive it  You may drive very short  distances only a few times a week  Or you may drive  long distances all the time in very hot  dusty weather   You may use your vehicle in making deliveries  Or you  may drive it to work  to do errands or in many other  Ways     Because of all the different ways people use their GM  vehicles  maintenance needs vary  You may even need  more frequent checks and replacements than you ll find  in the schedules in this section  So please read this  section and note how you drive  If you have any  questions on how to keep your vehicle in go
115. dex for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     ACTUAL MILEAGE   SERVICED BY           7 41    Maintenance Schedule          60 000 Miles  100 000 km       1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service    C Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first      C  For supercharged engines only  Check the  supercharger oil level and add oil as needed   or every 36 months  whichever occurs  first   See    Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants    in this section    An Emission Control Service    LI Inspect engine accessory drive belt  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first         Drain  flush and refill cooling system  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first         See  Engine Coolant  in the Index for what  to use  Inspect hoses  Clean radiator   condenser  pressure cap and neck  Pressure  test the cooling system and pressure cap   An Emission Control Service    C  Replace spark plugs  An Emission Control  Service    LJ  Inspect spark plug wires  An Emission  Control Service        Replace air cleaner filter  An Emission  Control Service    LJ Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  damage  Replace parts as needed    An Emission Control Service  T          DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE       SE RVICED BY         aa  yi  
116. down to turn off the lamp     To avoid draining your vehicle s battery  be sure to turn  off the reading lamps when leaving your vehicle     2 40                      Inside Manual Rearview Mirror       When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position   adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your car   Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down and  side      side  The day night adjustment allows you to  adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lights behind  you  Pull the tab forward for daytime use  Push it back  for night use     Automatic Rearview Mirror       The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare when  set in the ON position  One photocell on the hack of the  mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside  Another  photocell is built into the mirror surface to sense  headlamps behind you    The mirror will darken gradually to reduce glare  This  change may take a few moments    Pressing the switch on the bottom of the mirror turns off  the day night function  The mirror will stay in the day  setting    To keep the photocells operating well  occasionally  clean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner        E     2 41    Convex Outside Mirror  Your passenger s side mirror is convex     A convex mirror s surface 15 curved so you can see more  from the driver s seat        CAUTION     A convex mirror can make things  like other  vehicles  look farther away than they really are     If you cut too sharply into the right lane  you  could h
117. e     Blizzard    in the Index          N CAUTION     It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll   Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is    running unless you have to  If you ve left the     engine running  the vehicle can move suddenly   You or others could be injured  To be sure your     vehicle won t move  even when you re on fairly  level ground  always set your parking brake and  move the shift lever to PARK  P      Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won t  move  See    Shifting Into PARK  PY in the Index    If you are parking on a hill and if you re pulling a  trailer  also see  Towing a Trailer  in the Index        Power Windows     ODNIM    Switches on the driver s armrest control each of the  windows when the ignition is on or in retained accessory  power  In addition  each passenger door has a control  switch for its own window     When the driver s window switch is held rearward for more  than a half second  the window will lower completely  The  window can be opened in smaller amounts by pressing the  switch rearward and releasing it immediately     To stop the window while it is lowering  press the    switch again  then release  To raise the window  hold the  switch forward                                                      2 20    Horn    You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols on    your steering wheel     Tilt Wheel       
118. e cable guides and underbody contact  32  C  or higher   points and linkage  or every 6 months    In hilly or mountainous terrain   whichever occurs first       When doing frequent trailer towing         Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service    If vou do not use your vehicle under any of   these conditions  the fluid and filter do not   require changing     ACTUAL MILEAGE                   BY        SERVICED BY           ACTUAL MILEAGE               7 15        51 000 Miles  85 000 km  54 000 Miles  90 000 km     CI Change engine oil and filter  or every C  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Service     LI Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and hnkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first     Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     ACTUAL MILEAGE   SERVICED BY         ACTUAL MILEAGE       7 16                 57 000 Miles  95 000 km        Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service        60 000 Miles  100 000 km      _  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift 
119. e center control regulates the  temperature of the air coming through the system  Turn  it toward the blue area for cooler air  Turn it Loward the  red area for warmer air    Mode Control  The right control has settings for air  conditioning and non air conditioning modes  The made  control allows you      choose the direction of air  delivery    There are three air conditioning settings  MA X  A C and  Bi level        MAX  This setting provides maximum cooling with the  least amount of work  MAX recirculates much of the air  inside your vehicle so it cools quickly  If used for long  periods  the air may become too cold and dry     A C  Use A C for normal cooling on hot days  This  setting cools the air entering your vehicle and directs it  through the instrument panel outlets  Adjust the  temperature and fan speed for your comfort      g  V  Bi Level  Use on cool  but sunny days  This  setting directs air into your vehicle in two ways  Cool air  is directed to the upper portion of your body through the  middle instrument panel outlets  while warmed air is  directed to the floor     The air conditioner compressor operates in all air  conditioner positions  It also operates in defrost and  defog when required by conditions  When the air  conditioner is       you may sometimes notice slight  changes in your vehicle s engine speed and power  This  is normal  because the system is designed to cycle the  compressor on and off ta keep the desired temperature     b  rf Vent  For mil
120. e its front in your  inside mirror  activate your right lane change signal  and move back into the right lane   Remember that  your right outside mirror is convex  The vehicle you  just passed may seem to be farther away from you  than it really is      Try not to pass more than one vehicle at    time on  two lane roads  Reconsider before passing the next  vehicle     Don t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly   Even though the brake lights are not flashing  it may  be slowing down or starting to turn    If you re being passed  make it easy for the  following driver to get ahead of you  Perhaps you  can ease a little to the right        Loss of Control    Let s review what driving experts say about what  happens when the three control systems  brakes  steering  and acceleration  don t have enough friction where the  tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked     In any emergency  don t give up  Keep trying to steer  and constantly seek an escape route or area of less  danger     Skidding    In a skid  a driver can lose control of the vehicle   Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable  care suited to existing conditions  and by not   overdriving  those conditions  But skids are always  possible     The three types of skids correspond to your Pontiac s  three control systems  In the braking skid your wheels  aren t rolling  In the steering or cornering skid  too  much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and  lose cornering force  An
121. e often in crashes than those who are  wearing safety helts    Rear passengers who aren t safety belted can be thrown  out of the vehicle in a crash  And they can strike others  in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts     Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions       Buckle  position and release it the same way as the lap   part of a lap shoulder belt  If the belt isn t long enough  Lap Shoulder Belt  sce  Safety Belt Extender  at the end of this section  The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder  Make sure the relcase button on the buckle is positioned belts  Here s how to wear one properly    so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly   if you ever had to             aM      io    When the lap belt is pulled out all the way  it will  lock  If it does  let it go back all the way and start  again  If the belt is not long enough  see  Safety Belt  Extender  at the end of this section  Make sure the  release button on the buckle is positioned so you  would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if  you ever had to        Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you   Don t let it get twisted     Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks     Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure        The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In a crash  this applies             1 25       force to the strong pelvic bones  And you d be less  likely to slide under the lap belt  If 
122. e zero reading        ope                                   FUNCTION MONITOR  This lets you know if you   are low on fluids or have a problem with a vehicle   function       CHECK OIL LEVEL  This message could mean  your cil level is low  If it comes on for more than  three seconds  see  Check Oil Level Warning Light   in the Index     e WASHER FLUID  This message means your  washer fluid tank is less than about 30  full  The  windshield portion of the vehicle outline will also  glow  If these come on  see  Windshield Washer  Fluid  in the Index    e LOW COOLANT  This message means your  coolant level has fallen to about half full  If it comes  on  see  Engine Coolant    in the Index    e CHECK GAGES  If this light comes on and stays    on while you are driving  check your gages for fuel   coolant temperature  oil pressure or battery voltage     SECURITY  You ll get    DOOR AJAR message       door is not fully closed  The vehicle outline will show  you which door it is  You will also get a HOOD AJAR  or TRUNK AJAR message if the hood or the trunk isn t  fully closed  The vehicle outline will also show you  these are ajar    LAMP MONITOR  Whenever you try to use one of  the following lamps the LAMP MONITOR will tell you  if a bulb is out        Head Lamp  Low and High Beam    Turn Signal Park Stop   Park Lamp Side Marker   Brake Lamp and Center High Mounted Stop Lamp    e             Back Up Lamp  e       Lamp Turn Side Marker License    If a bulb is out  you will see    messa
123. ea  only  If you use them  don t saturate the stained area    e l  aring forms after spot cleaning  clean the entire  area immediately or it will set                      Using Foam Type Cleaner on Fabric     Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt        Always clean a whole trim panel or section  Mask  surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines        Mix Multi Purpose Powdered Cleaner following the  directions on the container label     Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge   Don t saturate the material     Don t rub it roughly     As soon as you ve cleaned the section  use    sponge  to remove the suds     Rinse the section with a clean  wet sponge   Wipe off what s left with a slightly damp paper towel  or cloth     e Then dry it immediately with a blow dryer or a heat  lamp     NOTICE     Be careful  A blow dryer may scorch the fabric        e Wipe with a clean cloth     Using Solvent Type Cleaner on Fabric    First  see if you have to use solvent type cleaner at all   Some spots and stains will clean off better with just  water and mild soap     If you need to use a solvent     e Gently scrape excess soil from the trim material with  a clean  dull knife or scraper  Use very little cleaner   light pressure and clean cloths  preferably  cheesecloth   Cleaning should start at the outside of  the stain     feathering    toward the center  Keep  changing to a clean section of the cloth        When you clean    stain from fabric  immediately dry    the area
124. ear  u safety belt properly  If you are in a crash and  you re not wearing    safety belt  vour injuries    can be much worse  You can hit things inside the  vehicle or be ejected from it  You can be seriously  injured or killed  In the same crash  you might  not be if you are buckled up  Always fasten vour  safety belt  and check that your passengers    belts  are fastened properly too           Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to  buckle up   See  Safety Belt Reminder Light  in the Index      In many states and Canadian provinces  the law says to  wear safety belts  Here s why  They work     You never know if you ll be in a crash  If you do have a  crash  you don t know if it will be a bad            A few crashes are mild  and some crashes can be so serious  that even buckled up a person wouldn t survive  But most  crashes are in between  In many of them  people who  buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away  Without  belts they could have been badly hurt or killed     After more than 25 years of safety beltsin vehicles  the facts  are clear  In most crashes buckling up does matter     a lot                              Why Safety Belts Work    When you ride in or on anything  vou go as fast as it  goes        Put someone on it        Take the simplest vehicle  Suppose it s just a seat on  wheels           Get it up to speed  Then stop the vehicle  The rider  doesn t stop     The person keeps going until stopped by something     In    real vehicle  
125. ed additional warming time  push the button  again  The system will then operate for five minutes  before going off by itself    Do not attach a temporary vehicle license  tape or decals  across the detogger grid on the rear window     NOTICE   Don t use    razor blade or something else sharp  on the inside of the rear window  If you do  you  could cut or damage the warming grid  and the  repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty                      Electronic Climate Control  Option     With this system  you can control the ventilation   heating and air conditioning in your vehicle  or you can  use the automatic setting  When you leave your vehicle  the system control setting is remembered the next time  you start vour car     AUTOMATIC OPERATION  When the system is set   or AUTO  sensors will control the air delivery made   Air will come from the floor  middle and windshield  outlets  The fan speed will vary as the system maintains  the selected temperature setting     To find your comfort zone  start with 75   temperature  setting  allow about 20 minutes for the system to  regulate  Press the TEMP button up or down to adjust  the temperature setting if necessary  If you choose the  temperature setting of 60  F  15  C   the system will  remain at that maximum cooling setting and will not  regulate the fan speed  If you choose the temperature       setting of 90  F  33  C   the system will remain at that  maximum heating setting and will not regulate the fan  speed  Choo
126. ed an elaborate     break in     But it will perform better in the long  run if you follow these guidelines        Don t drive at any one speed    fast or slow     for the first 500 miles  804 Km   Don t  make full throttle starts   Avoid making hard stops for the first 200    miles  322       or so  During this time your  new brake linings aren t yet broken in   Hard stops with new linings can mean  premature wear and earlier replacement   Follow this    breaking in    guideline every  time you get new brake linings    Don t tow a trailer during    break in     See   Towing a Trailer  in the Index for more  information     2 13    Ignition Switch       With the ignition key in the ignition switch  you can turn  the switch to five positions    ACCESSORY  A             position in which you can  operate your electrical power accessories  Press in the  ignition switch as you turn the top of it toward you     LOCK  B   The only position in which you can remove  the key  This locks your steering wheel  ignition and  transaxle     OFF  C   Unlocks the steering wheel  ignition  and  transaxle  but does not send electrical power to any  accessories  Use this position if your vehicle must be  pushed or towed  but never try to push start your  vehicle  A warning chime will sound if you open the  driver s door when the ignition is off and the key is in  the ignition    RUN  D  An ON position to which the switch returns  after you start your engine and release the switch  The  switch st
127. ed engine     When the engine is not running  the gage shows the  condition of the charging system  Readings outside the  red warning zone indicate the normal operating range   Readings in the red warning zone indicate    possible  problem in the electrical system  The CHECK GAGES  light will also come on  and a warning chime will sound   Have your vehicle serviced immediately     When your engine is not running  hut the ignition 15 on   in the RUN position   the gage shows your battery s  state of charge in DC volts     2 65    Boost Gage  Option  Driver Information Center      i        DRIVER    CHECK OIL LEVEL    WASHER         LOW COOLANT  CHECK GAGES  HOOD DOOR                            TURAN         BACK UP TAIL             LARP    MILES           TRIP  SRABBE                      Vehicles equipped with the supercharged engine have If you have the Driver Information Center  it gives you  this boost gage that indicates vacuum during light to important safety and maintenance facts  When you turn  moderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle  The the ignition on  the entire center lights up for a few  gage displays the air pressure level in psi going into the seconds  Then it goes to work     engine s combustion chamber     The gage 1s automatically centered at zero psi every  time the engine is started  Actual vacuum or boost is  displayed from this zero point  Changes in ambient  pressure  such as driving in mountains and changing  weather  will slightly change th
128. egin to overheat  the traction control  system will turn off and the warning light will come  on until your brakes cool down        Ifthe traction control system is affected by an  engine related problem  the system will turn off and  the warning light will come on     If the traction control system warning light comes on  and stays on for an extended period of time when the  system is turned on  your vehicle needs service           Engine Coolant Temperature Warning  Light    This light tells you that your  engine coolant has  overheated or your radiator  cooling fans are not  working     Il you have been operating your vehicle under normal  driving conditions  you should pull off the road  stop  your vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible     In the section    Problems on the Road   this manual  explains what to do  See  Engine Overheating  in the  Index     Some clusters with gages do not have a coolant  temperature warning light  In those clusters a CHECK  GAGES warning light will alert you of a possible  coolant heating problem     2 55    Engine Coolant Temperature Gage       This gage shows the engine  coolant temperature       TF the gage pointer moves  into the red area  your  engine is too hot  The  CHECK GAGES light will  go on and a warning chime  will sound  if you have this  option     It means that your engine coolant has overheated  If you  have been operating your vehicle under normal driving  conditions  vou should pull off the road  stop your  
129. el    SHDU          o sag aie Tes      ER RA EUR ERI s 6 3   S800 Supercharged Engine                        6 4  Pus Da LoGk aS uada ida         6 7  Fuel Door Manual Release       eee ee eee ee         Poel         oie        lisa ard ane erie liad sia d Me  Fusk Filme  Your          Lure te 6 7  Fuel  In Foreign Countries                 Few visse  Fuse Panel  Left Side          6 50         PAGAL sudo Mm 6 52  Fuses and Circuit Breakers        Site a E IAN woe i rye  6 49  Gaze  EROR ssa tera la Moss Giese EE a e bare ate eee 2 66  Gage  Engine Coolant Temperature                er  4 720  AD            EL Ese aal                      2 65                               eiciia pa ee ee eee a a          9  Gasolines for Cleaner Air                                 GAWR  Gross Axle Weight Rating                e  4 29                  5 eased er  earl ep ER IEEE             Gne CINE                        TERCER          DOCE ceca 6 43  LM E EE reos m KC AUR IURE Ron           n Fea moa o ow s x 2 8  GVWR  Gross Vehicle Weight Rating                 4 28       PHIBRE T luu wu               FR EE        Rc ER Tg 6 30  Hazard Warning Fl  sher amp            e cree BS 98   Hen ASTI uu rau PE a Cedar a a dE 1 4       Head Up Display                    2 60    Headlamp High Low Beam Changer           ea bat 2 38             Wing                   6 49  Headlamps occ cee Tax EIE CIT iS a  Headlamps  Bulb Replacement ee ar Oe 6 30  Hearing or Speech Impaired  Customer Assistance    
130. eld wiper arm away from the    Fog I Bulb Repl t windshield    og 1  ilb Replacemen                    E 2  Lift the release clip with a screwdriver and pull the   If you have fog lamps  changing your fog lamp bulbs blade assembly off the wiper arm    requires proper aiming equipment  See your Pontiac    dealer if you have any questions  3  Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm        eee              Tires N    We don t make tires  Your new vehicle comes with high CAUTION     quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer  These Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are    tires are warranted by the tire manufacturers and their        i i dangerous    warranties are delivered with every new Pontiac     your      j pes   spare tire is a different brand than your road tires  you   Overloading your tires can cause   will have a tire warranty folder from each of these overheating as a result of too much friction     manufacturers  You could have an air out and    serious  accident  See    Loading Your Vehicle  in the  Index   Underinflated tires pose the same danger as  overloaded tires  The resulting accident  could cause serious injury  Check all tires  frequently to maintain the recommended  pressure  Tire pressure should be checked  when your tires are cold   Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut   punctured  or broken by a sudden impact   such as when you hit a pothole  Keep tires  at the recommended pressure   Worn  old tires can cause accident
131. engine is hot    enough  You or others could be hurned  and your     vehicle could be damaged  Add brake fluid only  when work is done on the brake hydraulic  system        There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in    your master cylinder might go down  The first is that the When your brake fluid falls to a low level  your brake  brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during warning light will come on  A chime will sound if you  normal brake lining wear  When new linings are put in  try to drive with this warning light on  See  Brake    the fluid level goes back up  The other reason is that System Warning Light  in the Index                                         6 27    What to Add    When vou do need brake fluid  use only DOT 3 brake  fluid    such as Delco Supreme 11     GM Part  No 1052535   Use new brake fluid from a sealed  container only  and always clean the brake fluid  reservoir cap before removing it     NOTICE        Don t let someone put in the wrong kind of  fluid  For example  just a few drops of  mineral based oil  such as engine oil  in  your brake system can damage brake    system parts so badly that they ll have to be  replaced    Brake fluid can damage paint  so be careful  not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle  If  you do  wash it off immediately  See   Appearance Care  in the Index     6 28       Brake Wear  Your Pontiac has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes     Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make  a high 
132. er things that                                       M                                  Engine Exhaust     N CAUTION      Engine exhaust can kill  It contains the gas   carbon monoxide  CO   which you can t see or   smell     can cause unconsciousness and death    You might have exhaust coming in if       Your exhaust system sounds strange or  different      Your vehicle gets rusty underneath      Your vehicle was damaged in a collision      Your vehicle was damaged when driving over  high points on the road or over road debris       Repairs weren t done correctly        Your vehicle or exhaust system had been  modified improperly      If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your   vehicle       Drive it only with all the windows down to  blow out any CO  and     Have your vehicle fixed immediately                         2 28             Running Your Engine While You re  Parked   It s better not to park with the engine running  But if you  ever have to  here are some things to know     Z  CAUTION     Idling the engine with the air system control off  could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle   see the earlier Caution under  Engine     Exhaust      Also  idling in a closed in place can let deadly    carbon monoxide        into your vehicle even if  the fan switch is at the highest setting  One place  this can happen is a garage  Exhaust    with CO     can come in easily  NEVER park in a garage  with the engine running    Another closed in place can be a blizzard   Se
133. ess SET  The word SET will appear on the digital  screen for five seconds    3  While SET is displayed  press one of the four push  buttons  1  3  5 or 7         Three additional stations  2  4 and 6  may be preset on  each radio band by pairing pushbuttons        Tune in the desired station    2  Press SET  and within five seconds press any two  side by side buttons  1 and 3  5 and 7  or 3 and 5  at  the same time     3  The station will return when the same two buttons  are pressed together               Stereo Radios with Cassette             POWER  With the ignition on  push the POWER knob  to turn the radio on or off     VOL  Turn the VOL knob right to increase volume   Turn the VOL knob left to decrease volume    AM FM  Press AM FM to select the                  FM2  bands  The display will show which band you are on  If  you press this button while a tape is playing  the tape  will stop and the radio will return to the      or FM band  you were last on    RECALL  When the ignition is aff  press RECALL to  displav the time  Each time you press RECALL with the  radio on  it will switch the display back and forth  hetween radio station and time     3 9    TUNE  Press lightly on the TUNE knob  It will spring  out to make it easier to adjust  Turn the knob to tune in  radio stations  Push the knob back in when you are done        SEEK Y     Press to seek and stop on the next higher or  lower radio station     Presetting Radio Stations     You may preset up to 18 radio stati
134. est surfaces of asphalt and  concrete  A tire marked C may have poor traction  performance    Warning  The traction grade assigned to this tire is based  on braking  straight ahead  traction tests and does not  include cornering  turning  traction     Temperature   A  B  C    The temperature grades are A  the highest   B  and C   representing the tire s resistance to the generation of  heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  lest wheel  Sustained high temperature can cause the  material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life  and  excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure   The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  which all passenger car tires must meet under the  Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No  109  Grades  B and A represent higher levels of performance on the  laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law     Warning  The temperature grade for this tire 15  established for a tire that is properly inflated and not  overloaded  Excessive speed  underinflation  or  excessive loading  either separately or in combination   can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure     These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger  car tires    While the tires available as standard or optional  equipment on General Motors vehicles may vary with  respect to these grades  all such tires meet General  Motors performance standards and have been approved  for use on
135. et genuine GM  parts and GM trained and supported service people        fe hope you ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM     Genuine GM parts have one of these marks        Doing Your Own Service Work    If you want to do some of your own service work  you ll  want to get the proper Pontiac Service Manual  It tells  you much more about how to service your Pontiac than  this manual can  To order the proper service manual  see   Service Publications  in the Index     Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting to  do your own service work  see  Servicing Your Air  Bag Equipped Pontiac  in the Index    You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list    the mileage and the date of any service work you  perform  See  Maintenance Record  in the Index     Z  CAUTION     You        be injured if you try to do service work   on a vehicle without knowing enough about it    e Besure you have sufficient knowledge   experience  and the proper replacement  parts and tools before you attempt any  vehicle maintenance task       Be sure to use the proper nuts  bolts and   other fasteners     English    and    metric      fasteners can be easily confused  If you use   the wrong fasteners  parts can later hreak   or fall off  You could be hurt               NOTICE     If vou try to do vour own service work without    knowing enough about it  your vehicle could be  damaged                               Fuel  3800 Engine  Code K     The 8th digit of your vehicle identificati
136. expense   Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up  materials available fram your dealer or other service  outlets  Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected  in your dealer s body and paint shop     Underbody Maintenance    Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust  control can collect on the underbody  If these are not  removed  accelerated corrosion  rust  can occur on the  underbody parts such as fuel lines  frame  floor pan  and  exhaust system even though they have corrosion  protection     At least every spring  flush these materials from the  underbody with plain water  Clean any areas where mud  and other debris can collect  Dirt packed in closed areas  of the frame should be loosened before being flushed   Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do  this for you     6 46    Chemical Paint Spotting    Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a  chemical fallout  Airborne pollutants can fall upon and  attack painted surfaces on your vehicle  This damage  can take two forms  blotchy  ringlet shaped  discolorations  and small irregular dark spots etched into  the paint surface     Although no defect in the paint job causes this  Pontiac  will repair  at no charge to the owner  the surfaces of  new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within  12 months or 12 000 miles  20 000 km  of purchase   whichever comes first           Appearance Care and Maintenance Materials  You can get these from your GM Parts Department    
137. f your vehicle ever gets stuck  in sand  mud  ice or snow  See    Rocking Your Vehicle     in the Index      4 8       To turn the system off  press  the TRACTION  CONTROL button located  on the console next to the  gear shift selector     The TRACTION OFF warning light will come on and  stay on  If the system is limiting wheel spin when you  press the button  the system won t turn off night away  It  will wait until there s no longer a current need to limit  wheel spin     You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing  the button again  The TRACTION OFF warning light  should go off        Braking in Emergencies    Use vour anti lock braking system when you need to   With anti lock  you can steer and brake at the same  time  In many emergencies  steering can help you more  than even the very best braking     Steering  Power Steering    If you lose power steering assist because the engine  stops or the system is not functioning  you can steer but  it will take much more effort    Variable Effort Steering   If your vehicle 15 equipped with this option  you have     variable effort steering svstem that eases steering effort  al speeds less than 20 mph  32 km h   This is  particularly useful when parking your vehicle   Steering Tips   Driving on Curves   It s important to take curves at a reasonable speed     A lot of the  driver lost control  accidents mentioned on  the news happen on curves  Here s why     Experienced driver or beginner  each of us 15 subject to  the 
138. ference  and  2   This device must accept any interference received   including interference that may cause undesired  operation    Should interference to this system occur  try this        Check to determine if battery replacement 15  necessary  See the instructions on battery  replacement       Check the distance  You may be too far from your  vehicle  This product has a maximum range        Check the location  Other vehicles or objects may be  blocking the signal       See your Pontiac dealer or a qualified technician for  service    Changes or modifications to this system by other than an    authorized service facility could void authorization to  use this equipment     2 5    Operation   The driver s door will unlock when UNLOCK is  pressed  If pressed again within 25 seconds  all doors  will unlock  Also  if your car 1s equipped with a locking  fuel filler door it will unlatch at this time  All doors will  lock when LOCK is pressed     The trunk will unlock when the opened trunk symbol on  the key fob is pressed  but only when the ignition is off     Press any button to illuminate the interior lamps  see   Illuminated Entry System  in the Index      Matching Transmitter s  To Your Vehicle    Each key chain transmitter 15 coded to prevent another  transmitter from unlocking your vehicle  If a transmitter  is lost or stolen  a replacement can be purchased through  your dealer  Remember to bring any remaining  transmitters with you when you go to your dealer  When  the dea
139. fine for your  vehicle     Methanol is methyl or wood alcohol     NOTICE     Fuel that is more than 5  methanol is bad for  your vehicle  Don t use it  It can corrode metal  parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic    and rubber parts  That damage wouldn t be  covered under your warranty  And even at 5  or  less  there must be    cosolvents    and corrosion  preventers in this fuel to help avoid these  problems           Gasolines for Cleaner Air    Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will  help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and  fuel system  That helps keep your engine in tune and  your emission control system working properly  It s  good for your vehicle  and you ll he doing your part for  cleaner air     Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates   General Motors recommends that you use gasolines with  these blending materials  such as MTBE and ethanol  By  doing so  you can help clean the air  especially in those  parts of the country that have high carbon monoxide  levels     In addition  some gasoline suppliers are now producing  reformulated gasolines  These gasolines are specially  designed to reduce vehicle emissions  General Motors  recommends that you use reformulated gasoline  By  doing so  you can help clean the air  especially in those  parts of the country that have high ozone levels    You should ask your service station operators if their  gasolines contain deposit control additives and  oxygenates  and if they have
140. fting Into PARK  P   in the Index  If     you re pulling a trailer  see    Towing a Trailer  in  the Index        Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK  P  range before  starting the engine  Your Pontiac has    brake transaxle  shift interlock  You have to fully apply your regular  brakes before you can shift from PARK when the ignition  key is in the ON position  If you cannot shift out of  PARK       ease pressure on the shift lever     push the  shift lever all the way into PARK and also release the  shift lever button on floor shift console models as you  maintain brake application  Then move the shift lever  into the gear you wish   Press the shift lever button before  moving the shift lever on floor shift console models   See     Shifting Out of PARK  P   later in this section     REVERSE  R   Use this gear to back up     NOTICE     Shifting to REVERSE      while your vehicle is    moving forward could damage your transaxle   Shift to REVERSE  R  only after your vehicle is  stopped        To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow   ice or sand without damaging your transaxle  see    If  You re Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or Snow    in the Index     2 19    NEUTRAL       In this position  your engine doesn t  connect with the wheels  To restart when you re already  moving  use NEUTRAL  N  only  Also  use NEUTRAL   N  when your vehicle 1s being towed         N CAUTION   Shifting out of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL      while    your engine is    racing     running at h
141. g  If they  aren t  your vehicle needs service           How to Add Coolant to the Coolant    Fg m Ts  Recovery Tank NOTICE   IF you haven t found a problem vet  but the coolant level In cold weather  water can freeze and crack the  isn t at FULL COLD  add a 50 50 mixture of clean water engine  radiator  heater core and other parts  Use   preferably distilled  and a proper antifreeze at the coolant the recommended coolant        recovery tank   See    Engine Coolant    in the Index for  more information about the proper coolant mix      A CAUTION       Adding only plain water to your cooling system  can be dangerous  Plain water  or some other  liquid like alcohol  can boil before the proper  coolant mix will  Your vehicle s coolant warning    system is set for the proper coolant mix  With  plain water or the wrong mix  your engine could  get too hot but you wouldn t get the overheat  warning  Your engine could catch fire and you or  others could be burned  Use a 50 50 mix of clean  water and a proper antifreeze          5 15           N CAUTION     Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling  system can hlow out and burn you badly  They are  under pressure  and if you turn the radiator  pressure cap    even a little     they can come out at    system  including the radiator pressure cap  is hot   Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure  cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap        CAUTION   You can be burned if you spill coolant      hot  engine p
142. ge  such as PARK  LAMP  and you will also see where the problem is on  the vehicle outline  The message stays on until the  problem is fixed  See  Replacement Bulbs  in the Index  for bulb details            2 67    If a burned out bulb is replaced  the warning light will Electronic Compass  Option   stay on until the bulb is used        Message            Bulbs Monitored   Hi Beam Lamp       Both Headlamp High Beams   Head Lamp          Both Headlamp Low Beams   Tum Signal            Front Left Turn Park             e ETE ea dr 1 Front Right Turn Park            AN           2 Rear Left Turn Stop   Bea ree                        2 Rear Right Turn Stop   Back         2 Back Up Lamps  Tail         iis s  amp         Only   HUE CUI      aes 4 Stop Tail Tum   VP ROS ATP 2 License Plate   separations QA EN dixi A ET a Right Rear Side Marker          AE          Left Rear Side Marker   Brake Lamp           4 Rear Stop Tail Turn                Center High Mounted Stop Some vehicles are equipped with an electronic compass   Park                     Front Park As with all compasses  this unit senses the earth s      Meca d ote teat Right Side Marker magnetic field to show the direction the car is pointing                        Side Marker       oe    The earth s magnetic field 1s not always the same   n LX  direction as true north as we know it  So  you must enter       a zone number to tell the compass the difference    between magnetic and actual north  This tells the   ANS  compa
143. halogen bulbs     CAUTION   Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas    that can explode  You can be badly hurt if you     aren t careful  See    Jump Starting  in the Index  for tips on working around a battery without  getting hurt        Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle  for longer storage periods     Jump Starting  For instructions  see  Jump Starting  in  the Index           For the type of bulb  see  Replacement Bulbs  in the 3  Twist the bulb assembly 1 6 turn and pull out the    Index  bulb assembly   1  Remove the two screws from the top of the 4  Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness  headlamp housing  and replace the bulb assembly     un      Reverse steps 1 3 to replace the bulb assembly and  headlamp housing     2  Lift the entire headlamp housing and tilt it forward     Taillamp Bulb Replacement   For the type of bulb  see  Replacement Bulbs  in the   Index    I  In the trunk  remove the two plastic nuts holding the  carpeting in place             Pull the carpet away from the rear corner of the  trunk                 6 31    Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement       3  Rotate the bulb housing 178 turn and remove it     4  To remove the bulb  push in and rotate       Replacement blades come in different types and            re low ais i 3  counterclockwise  removed in different ways  Here s how to remove the  5  Replace the bulb  type with a release clip   6  Reverse the steps to reassemble the taillamp  1  Pull the windshi
144. he left of the steering  wheel  the panel 1s under the instrument panel     A    LPPLERE DE    Position    Circuitry    Circum Breuker Power  Windows  Sunroof   Not Used   Power Seats Circuit Brakes   Nut Used   Not Used   Crank Signal Air Bag  WATS   Spare   Not Used   Interior Lamps   Ignition  Run   Automate        Control  Base Cluster   Courtesy Lamps  Power Mirrors          Used   Not Used    Cigarette Lighter   Turn Signal  Back up Lamps   Cornering Lamps   Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock    Spare   Not Used   Not Used   Anti Lock Brake System   Ride Control       Position Circuitry    Brake and Hazard Lamps  Nor Used   Not Used   Electronic Level Control  Air Bag   Spare   Nat Used    Position Circuitry    Heated Mirror   Not Lised   Base         Fog Lamps   Not Used   Radio   Cigarette Lighter  Rear   Auxiliary Outlet   Not Used   Ignition  Off Unlack   Mot Used   Mot Used   Not Used   Not Used   Wipers  Washer   Rear Window Detog    Not Used    Cooling Fans  Transaxle   Parking Lamps   Nat Used   Not Used   Battery  Chime  Radio  Cluster    gnition  Kun Crank   Chime   Cluster   Spare                             8               Right Side Fuse Panel  Additional fuses are located in  the relay center  on the far right side  below the  instrument panel  You must remove the sound insulator  on the right side of the passenger foot well to replace  these fuses     E 0  EET    LI 029  OAG    Replacing these fuses is difficult  We recommend that  you see your dealer if you
145. hen to make sure the seat is locked into place    the vehicle is not moving           Power Seat  Option     To adjust ihe power seats on  some models        Front Control  Raise the front of the seat by holding  the switch up  Lower the front of the seat by holding the  switch down     Center Control  Move the seat forward by pressing the  control toward the right  or backward by pressing it  toward the left    Move the seat higher by holding the control up  Lower  the seat hy holding the control down    Rear Control  Raise the rear of the seat by holding the  switch up  Lower the rear of the seat by holding the  switch down     Adjustable Support Seat  Option        On some models  you ll  find the controls on the  center console  Slide the  selector switch to    L             R    to choose the front seat  you want to adjust         Adjusts the seat forward or back   lad Adjusts the seat up or down   af    Adjusts the seatback to an upright or reclined    position  Don t have a seatback reclined if your  vehicle is moving           Reclining Front Seatbacks  ud 4 Adjusts the position of the seatback side bolsters   W Tilts the rear of the seat up or down    ed Tilts the front of the seat up or down    Lumbar Controls    m  Reshapes the lower back area of the seat     P  Reshapes the middle back area of the seat     af E Reshapes the upper back area of the seat        Lift the lever to release the seatback  then tilt the  seatback forward or backward as desired  Release the
146. hen your engine is overheated   the liquids in it can catch fire  You or others could    be badly burned  Stop your engine if it overheats   and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool        NOTICE       If your engine catches fire because you keep      driving with no coolant  your vehicle can be  badly damaged  The costly repairs would not be  covered by your warranty        If No 5team Is Coming From Your Engine  If vou get the overheat warning        see or hear no  steam  the problem may not be tao serious  Sometimes  the engine can get a little too hot when you    e Climb a long hill on a hot day       Stop alter high speed driving       idle for long periods in traffic       Tow a trailer           If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam   try this for a minute or so     l  Turn off your air conditioner     2  Turn on your heater      full hot at the highest fan  speed and open the window as necessary    3  If you re in a traffic jam  shift to NEUTRAL  N    otherwise  shift to the highest gear while driving     AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE       or DRIVE  D      If you no longer have the overheat warning  you can    drive  Just to be safe  drive slower for about ten minutes     If the warning doesn t come back on  you can drive  normally     If the warning continues  pull over  stop  and park your  vehicle right away     If there s still no sign of steam  you can idle the engine  for two or three minutes while you re parked  to see if  the warning stops  
147. her loose or damaged  restraint system parts  If you see anything that might  keep a restraint system from doing its job  have it  repaired    Torn or frayed belts may not protect vou in a crash     They can rip apart under impact forces  If a belt is torn  or frayed  get a new one right away     Replacing Seat and Restraint System  Parts After a Crash    If you ve had a crash  do you need new belts     After a very minor collision  nothing may be necessary   But if the belts were stretched  as they would he if worn  during    more severe crash  then you need new belts     If belts are cut or damaged  replace them  Collision  damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt  or seat parts repaired or replaced  New parts and repairs  may be necessary even if the belt wasn t heing used at  the time of the collision     If your seat adjuster won t work after a crash  the special  part of the safety belt that goes through the seat to the  adjuster may need to be replaced                                       Y Section 2 Features and Controls  REN        7                Here you        learn about the many standard and optional features on your Pontiac  and information on starting   shifting and braking  Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is  working properly    and what to do if you have a problem     Kevs    Z  CAUTION     Leaving voung children in a vehicle with the  ignition key is dangerous for many reasons      
148. hichever occurs first     CI Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information       ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY        45 000 Miles  75 000 km     1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first      ACTUALMILEAGE  SERVICED BY      Maintenance Schedule H       50 000 Miles  83 000 km      _  Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  more of these conditions        In heavy city traffic where the outside  temperature regularly reaches 90  F   32  C  or higher        In hilly or mountainous terrain        When doing frequent trailer towing        Uses such as found in taxi  police or  delivery service    If you do not use your vehicle under any of   these conditions  the fluid and filter do not   require changing     52 500 Miles  87 500         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first         Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the In
149. hicle emissions  General Motors  recommends that you use reformulated gasoline  By  doing so  you can help clean the air  especially in those  parts of the country that have high ozone levels     You should ask your service station operators if their  pasolines contain deposit control additives and  oxyeenates  und if they have been reformulated to  reduce vehicle emissions     Fuels in Foreign Countries    If you plan on driving in another country outside the     5  or Canada  unleaded fuel may be hard to find  Do  not use leaded gasoline  If you use even one tankful   your emission controls won t work well or at all  With  continuous use  spark plugs can get fouled  the exhaust  system can corrode  and your engine oil can deteriorate  quickly  Your vehicle s oxygen sensor will be damaged   All of that means costly repairs that wouldn t be covered  by your warranty     To check on fuel availability  ask an auto club  or  contact a major eil company that does business in the  country where you ll be driving     You can also write us ut the following address for  advice  Just tell us where you re going and give your  Vehicle Identification Number  VIN      General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation  North American Export Sales  N AES     908 Colonel Sam Drive   Oshawa  Ontario LIH 8P7       6 6      Fuel Door Lock  Option     On    model equipped with the Theft Deterrent System   the fuel door 15 locked and unlocked together with the  power door lacks  Therefore  to unlo
150. hile Using              2 36   Reduce Sp  ed 1    2l           deua rae s at   Rumes SRE SE uiu saa esce eene og oc ok 2 35   Geb                            D RUE Praed 2 35   Traction Control Activated              Jor 93 4 T aT   Le OB TRUER arg Sass ra hace d rey cas ee gee 2 36  Cupholder  Door syaire ear howe n ht 2 46  Customer Assistance for Hearing or Speech Impaired    8 2  Customer Assistance Information                eee       Customer Satisfaction Procedure         4      4             Damage                         ere eee   6 45  Damage  Sheet Metal                          6 45  Daytime Running Lamps                     2238  Dead Battery          PRG           RM              5 2  Defects  Reparting CET REY eae TS pe 8 4  Defensive Driving                       ee                  4 1  Defogger  Rear Window 6 2     5 0 cee cee RI hg 3 3  Defogger  Rear Window  Electronic Climate Control      3 3  DEBIT ouo room ee Ee eee Sees 3 3  CASIO                          bie cre sey          Mae DE a a eee  py Heads core        seek EE RR 2 64   Door  amp jar Message        2222 22222222222222222 267                                sep eee e            EU  Door LOCKS        sess soie                                                Drive Position  Automatic Transaxle         rV Lr Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light            2 55    Diver Information  Genier       err mme 2 66                 joe  cane eal rand aane aaa i ae t RD  Driving On Grades  With a Trailer 
151. hing  a small shovel  a flashlight     red cloth  and a  couple of reflective warning triangles  And  if you will  he driving under severe conditions  include a small bag  of sand     piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags  e You may want to put winter emergency supplies in to help provide traction  Be sure you properly secure  your trunk  these items in your vehicle        Have your Pontiac in good shape for winter  Be sure  your engine coolant mix is correct                      SS SS SS    Driving on 5now or Ice    Most of the time  those places where vour tires meet the  road probably have good traction     However  if there is snow or ice between your tires and  the road  you can have a very slippery situation  You ll  have a lot less traction or  grip  and will need to be very  careful           What s the worst time for this   Wet ice   Very cald  snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on  But wet  ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the  least traction of all  You can get  wet ice  when it s  about freezing  32  F  0  C  and freezing rain begins to  fall  Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand  crews can get there     Whatever the condition    smooth ice  packed  blowing  or loose snow    drive with caution     If you have traction control  keep the system on  It will  improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a  slippery road  Even though your vehicle has a traction  control system  you ll want to slow down and adjust  
152. hs  whichever occurs first    See  Engine Coolant  in the Index for what  to use  Inspect hoses  Clean radiator   condenser  pressure cap and neck  Pressure  test the cooling system and pressure cap   An Emission Control Service      Continued     7 23    Maintenance Schedule I    90 000 Miles  150 000 km   Continued         Replace spark plugs  An Emission Control  Service    C  Inspect spark plug wires  An Emission  Control Service  F   Replace air cleaner filter  Replace filter  more often under dusty conditions    An Emission Control Service    O Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  damage  Replace parts as needed    An Emission Control Service  T    7 24         For supercharged engines only  Check the  supercharger oil level and add oil as needed   or every 36 months  whichever occurs  first   See  Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants  in this section    An Emission Control Service  Y   LI Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY              Maintenance Schedule I       93 000 Miles  155 000 km  96 000 Miles  160 000 km    O Change engine oil and filter  or every     Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Service     C Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  p
153. ication  or every 12 months  whichever  occurs first    At 7 500 Miles  12 500 km    Then Every   15 000 Miles  25 000 km    Tire Rotatian   Every 30 000 Miles  50 000 km    Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection  or every  24 months  whichever occurs first    Cooling System Service  or every 24 months  whichever  occurs first    Spark Plug Replacement   Spark Plug Wire Inspection   Supercharger Oil Check  3 8L Code 1 Engine Only   Air Cleaner Filter Replacement   Fuel Tank  Cap and Lines Inspection   Every 50 000 Miles  83 000 Km    Automatic Transaxle Service  severe conditions           The services shown in this schedule up to 100 000 miles   166 000 km  should be performed after 100 000 miles   166 000 km  at the same intervals     Footnotes      The U S  Environmental Protection Agency or the  California Air Resources Board has determined that the  failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify  the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the  completion of vehicle useful life  We  however  urge that  all recommended maintenance services be performed at  the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded        3 000 Miles  5 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service        DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY           Maintenance Schedule I      6 000 Miles  10 000 km  9 000 Miles  15 000 km   Change engine oil and filter  or every   1 Change engine oil and filter  
154. ice    _  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first    C  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY                                    eee    Maintenance Schedule I       69 000 Miles  115 000 km  72 000 Miles  120 000 km    L  Change engine oil and filter  or every   L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Service         Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first         ACTUAL MILEAGE SERV ICED BY  DATE   ACTUALMILEAGE  SERVICED BY                 75 000 Miles  125 000 km     Ll Change engine oil and filter  or every L  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever cecurs first      78 000 Miles  130 000 km     3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service     _  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first      An Emission Control Service       Inspect air cleaner filter if you a
155. ie a red          cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you ve been    stopped by the snow  Put on extra clothing or wrap    CAUTION     blanket around you  If you have no blankets or extra    clothing  make body insulators from newspapers  burlap Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle   bags  rags  floor mats    anything you can wrap around This can cause deadly CO  carbon monoxide  gas  yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm  to get inside  CO could overcome you and kill  You can run the engine to keep warm  but be careful  you  You can t see it or smell it       you might not    know it is in your vehicle  Clear away snow from    around the base of your vehicle  especially any  that is blocking your exhaust pipe  And check  around again from time to time to be sure snow  doesn t collect there     Open a window just a little on the side of the  vehicle that   s away from the wind  This will help  keep CO out        Kun your engine only as long as you must  This saves  fuel  When you run the engine  make it go a little faster  than just idle  That is  push the accelerator slightly  This  uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the  battery charged  You will need a well charged battery to  restart the vehicle  and possibly for signaling later on  with your headlamps  Let the heater run for awhile                    4 27    Then  shut the engine off and close the window almost  all the way to preserve the heat  Start the engine again  and 
156. igh speed  is  dangerous  Unless your foot is firmly on the  brake pedal  your vehicle could move very  rapidly  You could lose control and hit people or  jects  Ar ENa              NOTICE     Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out    of PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N  with the engine  racing isn t covered by your warranty           AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE  W   This position is for  normal driving  If you need more power for passing  and  you re   Going less than about 35 mph  56 km h   push your  accelerator pedal about halfway down       Going about 35 mph  56 km h  or more  push the  accelerator all the way down   You ll shift down to the next gear and have more  power     NOTICE     If your vehicle seems to start up rather slowly  or  if it seems not to shift gears as you go faster   something may be wrong with a transaxle system    sensor  If you drive very far that way  your  vehicle can be damaged  5o  if this happens  have  your vehicle serviced right away  Until then  you  can use SECOND  2  when you are driving less  than 35 mph  56 km h  and  0  for higher speeds           DRIVE  D   This is like  0   but you never go into  OVERDRIVE     Here are some times you might choose DRIVE  D   instead of            When driving on hilly  winding roads        When towing a trailer  so there is less shifting  between gears    When going down a steep hill  SECOND  2   This position gives you more power but    lower fuel economy  You can use SECOND  2  on hills     It can help con
157. ignition key in  your hand  your vehicle is in PARK  P         _ SS                  _   _                                                       MM                            Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  set the parking brake     Move the shift lever into PARK  P  position like this      Hold in the button on the lever        Push the lever all the way toward the front of the  vehicle    Move the ignition key to LOCK    Remove the key and take it with you  If you can    walk away from your vehicle with the ignition key in    your hand  your vehicle is in PARK  P                      ae    Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Torque Lock    Running If you are parking on a hill and you don t shift vour  transaxle into PARK  P  properly  the weight of the  vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in  the transaxle  You may find it difficult to pull the shift  lever out of PARK  P   This is called  torque lock   To  prevent torque lock  set the parking brake and then shift  into PARK  P  properly before you leave the driver s  seat  To find out how  see    Shifting Into PARK  P   in  the Index     When you are ready to drive  move the shift lever out of  PARK  P  before you release the parking brake     If    torque lock  does occur  you may need to have  another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of  the pressure from the transaxle  so you can pull the shift  If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine lever out af PARK  P     
158. il    the correct hour appears              Setting the Clock for Radios with Cassette    or CD       PERLE                  1     Press and hold the      or  MIN button until the  hours or minutes begin  to change on the time  display  While the radio  is in the time set mode   the colon in the display  will blink     2  Press the HR and MIN buttons until the correct time    appears     ted  i   d    AM FM Stereo Radio       The digital display indicates information on time or  radio station frequency  the AM or FM radio band   whether the station is in stereo  and other functions     PWR VOLUME    The upper knob does these things       Rotate it to turn the system on and off      Rotate it to control the volume         Press it to recall the station frequency when the radio  is on     The control ring behind the upper knob adjusts the left  and right speaker balance     3 8    TUNE   AM FM    The lower knob does these things       Rotate it to tune in radio stations       Press it to change between the AM or FM band     The control ring behind the lower knob adjusts the front  and rear speaker balance       SEEK     Pressing SEEK will cause the receiver to  seek the next higher ar lower station on the band     TREB  Slide this lever up to increase treble  or down to   decrease it  If    station is Weak or noisy  decrease the   treble    BASS  Slide this lever up to increase bass or down to   decrease it    Presetting Radio Stations    l  Tune in the desired station    2  Pr
159. ild passenger        Securing a Child Restraint in the Right You ll be using the lap shoulder belt  See the earlier part  Front Seat Position about the top strap if the child restraint has one     1  Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air  bag  always move the seat as far back as it will go  before securing a forward facing child restraint   See     Seats    in the Index      bo    Put the restraint on the seat  Follow the instructions  for the child restraint        3  Secure the child in the child restraint as the  instructions say     Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag  Never  put a rear facing child restraint in this seat  Here s why        1 37       4  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder 3  Buckle the belt   portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show you how     Make sure the release button 15 positioned so you  would he able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if  you ever had to    If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or  neck  put it behind the child restraint    6  Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the  retractor to set the lock           Larger Children       7  Totighten the belt  feed the lap belt back into the  retractor while you push down on the child restraint     Children who have outgrown child restraints should    8  Push and pull the child restraint in different wear the velticle   s safety belts     direc
160. inal tires        6 36                N CAUTION     Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while  driving  If you mix tires of different sizes or types   radial and hias belted tires   the vehicle may not  handle properly  and you could have a crash  Be  sure to use the same size and type tires on all four  wheels    It s all right to drive with your compact spare   though  It was developed for use on vour vehicle             Uniform Tire Quality Grading    The following information relates to the system  developed by the United States National Highway  Traffic Safety Administration which grades tires by  treadwear  traction and temperature performance   This  applies only to vehicles sold in the United States            Treadwear    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  conditions on    specified government test course  For  example  a tire graded  50 would wear one and a half   1 1 2  times as well on the government course as a tire  graded 100  The relative performance of tires depends  upon the actual conditions of their use  however  and  may depart significantly from the norm due to variations  in driving habits  service practices and differences in  road characteristics and climate     Traction   A  B  C    The traction grades  from highest to lowest are  A  B   and C  They represent the tire s ability to stop on wet  pavement as measured under controlled conditions on  specified government t
161. ion    that s a  safety feature  To restart when you re already moving    use NEUTRAL  N  only        NOTICE   Don t try to shift to PARK  P  if vour Pontiac is    moving  If you do  you could damage the  transaxle  Shift to PARK  P  only when your  vehicle is stopped        To start your 3 8 Liter engine     1  Without pushing the accelerator pedal  turn your  ignition key to START  When the engine starts  let  go of the key  The idle speed will go down as your  engine gets warm     NOTICE   Holding your key in START for longer than 15    seconds at a time will cause your battery to be  drained much sooner  And the excessive heat can  damage your starter motor               2 15    7    aes    If it doesn t start right away  hold your key in  START for about three to five seconds at    time until  your engine starts  Wait about  5 seconds between  each try to help avoid draining your battery     If your engine still won t start  or starts but then  stops   it could be flooded with too much gasoline   Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the  floor and holding it there as you hold the key in  START for about three seconds  If the vehicle starts  briefly but then stops again  do the same thing  but    this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds     This clears the extru gasoline from the engine  After  waiting about 15 seconds  repeat the normal starting  procedure     NOTICE     Your engine is designed to work with the  electronics in your vehicle  If y
162. ious  or SEEK to go to the beginning of the current  track  if more than eight seconds have played   Press it  again or hold it down to go to the previous tracks  The  display will show the track number     NEXT  While playing a compact disc  press NEXT or  SEEK to go to the next track  Press it again or hold it  down to continue advancing through the tracks     RDM  Press the RDM  random  button to cause the CD  player to play the tracks on the disc in random order   RDM will be displayed in the lower right corner of the  display during random operation  Press RDM again to  turn off the random feature     KEY  Press and hold REV  reverse  to rapidly reverse  the disc  The radio display will show the time into the  track during fast reverse operation    FWD  Press and hold FWD  forward  to rapidly  advance the disc  The radio display will show the time  into the track during fast reverse operation    EJECT  Press EJECT to remove the disc  The radio will  play after the disc is ejected  EJECT will operate while  the ignition is off        3        3 13    Radio THEFTLOCK     Feature    You may have the THEFTLOCK feature which is  designed to discourage theft of your radio  It works by  using a secret code to disable all radio functions  whenever the battery power is removed     The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used       ignored  If ignored  the system plays normally and the  radio is not protected by the feature     If THEFTLOCK is activated  the THEFTLOCK light  wi
163. is too loose  It won t give nearly  as much protection this way        1 2        M  e        What s wrong with this        CAUTION     You can be seriously injured if your belt is  buckled in the wrong place like this  In a crash   the belt would go up over your abdomen  The    belt forces would be there  not at the pelvic  bones  This could cause serious internal injuries   Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest  you            The belt is buckled in the wrong place     Q  What s wrong with this            The shoulder belt is worn under the arm  It should  be worn over the shoulder at all times     1 14            CAUTION     You can be seriously injured if you wear the     shoulder belt under your arm  In    crash  your   body would move too far forward  which would   increase the chance of head and neck injury    Also  the belt would apply too much force to the   ribs  which aren t as strong as shoulder bones      You could also severely injure internal organs  like your liver or spleen                   What s wrong with this            The belt is twisted across the body        N CAUTION     You can be seriously injured by    twisted belt  In     crash  you wouldn t have the full width of the    belt to spread impact forces  If a belt is twisted   make it straight so it can work properly  or ask  your dealer to fix it        1 15    To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle  Supplemental Inflatable Restraint  The belt should go back out af the wa
164. it a vehicle on your right  Check your  inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before  changing lanes     Manual Remote Control Mirror   The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you  can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting  in a comfortable driving position    Adjust the driver side outside mirror with the control  lever on the driver s door    To adjust your passenger side mirror  sit in the driver s  seal and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you        Power Remote Control Mirrors   Option        control lever on the  driver s door controls both  outside rearview mirrors     Select the mirror you want to adjust by rotating the lever  to the left or right  Adjust each mirror so that you can    just see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your    vehicle  when vou are sitting in a comfortable driving  position   When you operate the optional rear window defogger     the outside rearview mirrors are also heated to help clear  them of ice and snow        2 42           Convenience Net  Option  Card Holder       The front doors on some vehicles have a card holder for  convenient storage of business cards or parking lot ticket  stubs  The card holder has space for up to five regular  Your vehicle may have a convenience net  You ll see it business cards     just inside the back wall of the trunk     Put small loads  like grocery bags  behind the net  It can  help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or  quick starts and stop
165. it could be the windshield              1 7    or the instrument panel                the safety belts     With safety belts  you slow down as the vehicle does   You get more time to stop  You stop over more distance   and your strongest bones take the forces  That s why  salety belts make such good sense     Here Are Questions Many People Ask     If I ma good driver  and I never drive far from  About Safety Belts    and the Answers             ROUT vere                            You may be an excellent driver  but if you re in arn   Q  Howe      Puppen 5s      volle afr un          even one that isn t your fault    you and   accident if Pm wearing a safety belt  your passengers can be hurt  Being a good driver  You could be    whether you re wearing a safety doesn t protect you fram things beyond your  helt or not  But you can unbuckle a safety belt  control  such as bad drivers   even if you re upside down  And your chance of  being conscious during and after an accident  so  you car unbuckle and get out  is much greater if  you are belted     A    Most accidents occur within 25 miles  40 km  of   home  And the greatest number of serious injuries and   deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph  65 km h    Safety belts are for everyone    Q  Why don t they just put in air bags so people   won t have to wear safety belts  How to Wear Safety Belts P roperly        Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in Adults  more of them in the future  But they are  supplementa
166. ities are approximate  When adding  be sure to fill to the appropriate level  as recommended in this manual     e   a HMMM G      Maintenance Replacement Parts    Aw Cleaner Element        avos hn rh AC Type     1096    Hngme Oll FIMEr erc en ER RR nn                            47  Fuel Filter             es ere        xaX ari AC Type GF  627  POV                                          AC Type CV  892C  Remote Lock Control Battery  2          ETT                d    Spark Plugs  L36  Engine                             AC Type  41  606   Gap  0 060 inch  1 52 mm   Spark Plugs  L67  Supercharged Engine                    AC Type  41  601   Gap  0 060 inch  1 52 mm   Wiper Blade       Nri  eR EET STER ETIN d eicere 22194001          Section 7    Maintenance Schedule       IMPORTANT   KEEP ENGINE OIL  AT THE PROPER   LEVEL AND CHANGE AS  RECOMMENDED       This section covers the maintenance required for your  Pontiac  Your vehicle needs these services to retain its    safety  dependability and emission control performance     Protection    Plan       Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan  The Pian    supplements your new vehicle warranties  See your  Pontiac dealer for details    Introduction    Your Vehicle and the Environment    Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your  vehicle in good working condition  but also helps the  environment  All recommended maintenance procedures  are important  Improper vehicle maintenance or the  removal of important components
167. k  Although it depends on each person and situation   here is some general information on the problem     The Blood Alcohol Concentration  BAC  of someone  who is drinking depends upon four things        How much alcohol consumed      The drinkers body weight      The amount of food that is consumed before and  during drinking      The length of time it s taken the drinker to consume  the alcohol    According to the American Medical Association  a  180 pound  82 kg  person who drinks three 12 ounce   355 ml  battles of beer in an hour will end up with a         of about 0 06 percent  The person would reach the  same        by drinking three 4 ounce  120 ml  glasses  of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1  1 2 ounces   45 ml  of a liquor like whiskey  gin or vodka           It s the amount of alcohol that counts  For example  if  the same person drank three double martinis  3 ounces  or 90 ml of liquor each  within an hour  the person s  BAC would he close to 0 12 percent  A person who  consumes food just hefore or during drinking will have a  somewhat Jower BAC level     There is a gender difference  too  Women generally have  a lower relative percentage of body water than men   Since alcohol is carried in body water  this means that a  woman generally will reach a higher        level than          man of her same body weight when each has the same  number of drinks     The l  w in many U S  states sets the legal limit at a BAC  of 0 10 percent  In a growing number of U 
168. k harder  against the drag of the added weight  The engine is  required ta operate at relatively higher speeds and under  greater loads  generating extra heat  What s more  the  trailer adds considerably to wind resistance  increasing  the pulling requirements        4 30              If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer  If you do  here are some important points        There are many different laws  including speed limit  restrictions  having to do with trailering  Make sure  your rig will be legal  not only where you live but  also where you ll be driving  A good source for this  information can be state or provincial police     e Consider using a sway control    You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls       Don t tow a trailer at all during the first 1000 miles   1 600 km  your new vehicle is driven  Your engine   axle or other parts could be damaged       Then  during the first 500 miles  800 km  that you  tow a trailer  don t drive over 50 mph  80 km h  and  don t make starts at full throttle  This helps your    engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the  heavier loads        Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer   Don t drive faster than the maximum posted speed  for trailers  or no more than 55 mph  90 km h   to  save wear on your vehicle s parts     Three important considerations have to do with weight        Weight of the Trailer  How heavy can a trailer safely be     It should never weigh more than 1 000 pounds  450 kg    But even that 
169. ken     EN    may be displayed     Check to see if your tape is broken  Try a new  Cassette              3 16    If the error occurred while trying to play a CD in the  radio or in the CD changer  the following conditions  may have caused the error           The road is too rough  The disc should play when the  road is smoother     The disc is dirty  scratched  wet or upside down     The air is very humid     so  wait about an hour and         again     any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be    corrected  please contact your dealer  If your radio  displays an error number  write it down and provide it to  your dealer when reporting the problem        Steering Wheel Controls for Audio System   Option        Some audio functions can  be operated with these  controls        AM FM  Press the bottom of this switch to select the  AM        or     2 radio bands  The band you select will  be displayed on the digital screen  The frequency of the  station will be displayed  and if the station is in stereo   the stereo indicator will also be displayed  If the cassette  or CD is playing and this switch is pressed  the cassette  or CD will stop playing and the radio will play    SEEK  Each time you press an up or down arrow on    SEEK  you will tune in the next station up or down the  AM or FM radio band        When listening to a cassette tape or compact disc  you  can change to the previous or next selection by pressing  the SEEK up or down arrow    RCL  Press RCL  recall 
170. l systems only  so they work with         safety belts    not instead of them  Every air bag Be aware that there are special things to know about safety  system ever offered for sale has required the use of belts and children  And there are different rules for smaller      children and babies  If a child will be riding in your   Pontiac  see the part of this manual called  Children     Follow those rules for everyone s protection     This part is only for people of adult size     safety belts  Even if you re in a vehicle that has air   bags  you still have to buckle up to get the most   protection  That s true not only in frontal collisions     4   but especially in side and other collisions  First  you ll want to know which restraint systems your     vehicle has     We ll start with the driver position        Driver Position 3  Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you            Don t let it get twisted   This part describes the driver s restraint system  E  3  Push the latch plate into the buckle until    clicks     Lap Shoulder Belt Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure  If  The driver has a lap shoulder belt  Here s how to wear    the belt isn t long enough  see  Safety Belt   properly  Extender  at the end of this section    1  Close and lock the door  Make sure the release button on the buckle is    positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the  safety belt quickly if you ever had to     2  Adjust the         to see how  see  Seats  in the I
171. l that the shoulder belt is still  very close to the child s face or neck  you might  want to place the child in the center seat position   the one that has only a lap belt           CAUTION     Never do this     Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  lap shoulder belt  but the shoulder part is behind    the child  If the child wears the belt in this way  in  a crash the child might slide under the belt  The  belt s force would then be applied right on the  child s abdomen  That could cause serious or  fatal injuries        Wherever the child sits  the lap portion of the belt  should be worn low and snug on the hips  just touching  the child s thighs  This applies belt force to the child s  pelvic bones in    crash           muCceeMMMMM99  50UDPPPW      Safety Belt Extender    If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you  you  should use it     But if a safety belt isn t long enough to fasten  your  dealer will order you      extender  It s free  When you go  in to order it  take the heaviest coat you will wear  so the  extender will be long enough for you  The extender will  be just for you  and just for the seat in your vehicle that  you choose  Don t let someone else use it  and use it  only for the seat it is made to fit  To wear it  just attach it  to the regular safety helt     Checking Your Restraint Systems    Now and then  make sure all your belts  buckles  latch  plates  retractors  anchorages and reminder systems are  working properly  Look for any ot
172. lder belt  and  the lap portion should he worn as low as possible  throughout the pregnancy        The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the  mother  When a safety belt is worn properly  it s more  likely that the fetus won t be hurt in a crash  For  pregnant women  as for anyone  the key to making  safety belts effective is wearing them properly     Right Front Passenger Position    The right front passenger s safety belt works the same  way as the driver s safety belt  Sce  Driver Position      earlier in this section     When the lap portion of the belt is pulled out all the  way  it will lock  If it does  let it go back all the way and  start again     If your vehicle has a center passenger position  be sure  to use the correct buckle when buckling your  lap shoulder belt  If you find that the latch plate will not  go Fully into the buckle  see if you are using the buckle  for the center passenger position        Center Passenger Position       Lap Belt    If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats  someone  can sit in the center positions        When vou sil in    center seating position  you have    lap  sufety belt  which has      retractor  To make the belt  longer  tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt        To make the belt shorter  pull its free end as shown until Rear Seat Passengers  the belt is snug     It s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up   Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear  seat are hurt mor
173. ler matches the replacement transmitter to your  vehicle  the remaining transmitters must also be  matched  Once the new transmitter is coded  the lost  transmitter will not unlock your vehicle     2 6    You can match a transmitter to as many different  vehicles as you own  provided they are equipped with  exactly the same model system   General Motors offers  several different models of these systems on their  vehicles   Each vehicle can have only two transmitters  matched to it     See your dealer to match transmitters to another vehicle     Battery Replacement    Under normal use  the batteries in your key chain  transmitter should last about two years     You can tell the batteries are weak if the transmitter  won t work at the normal range in any location  If you  have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter  works  it s probably time to change the batteries           To replace batteries in the  key chain transmitter     1  Remove the screw from  back cover     2  Lift the front cover off   bottom half first        3  Remove and replace the two batteries  2016    4  Reassemble the transmitter     5  Check the transmitter operation        Rear Door Security Locks  E AX NO Your Pontiac 15 equipped       with rear door security  locks that help prevent  passengers from opening  the rear doors of vour car  from the inside  To use one  of these locks     1  Move the lever all the way up to the ENGAGED    position   2  Close the door   3  Do the same thing to the
174. limits for  distances up to 3 000 miles  5 000 km   so you can  finish vour trip and have your full size tire repaired or  replaced where you want  Of course  it s best to replace  your spare with a full size tire as soon   s you can  Your  spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you  need it again        5 32          NOTICE     Don t take your compact spare through an  automatic car wash with guide rails  The    compact spare can get caught on the rails  That  can damage the tire and wheel  and maybe other  parts of your vehicle        Don t use your compact spare      some other vehicle     And don t mix your compact spare or wheel with other  wheels or tires  They won t fit  Keep vour spare and its  wheel together     NOTICE     Tire chains won t fit your compact spare  Using    them will damage your vehicle and destroy the  chains too  Don t use tire chains on your compact  spare        If You re Stuck  In Sand  Mud  Ice or  Snow   What you don t want to do when your vehicle is stuck ts  to spin your wheels too fast  The method known as   rocking  can help you get out when you re stuck  but  you must use caution     A  CAUTION     If you let your tires spin at high speed  they can      explode and you or others could be injured  And   the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can    overheat  That could cause an engine  compartment fire or other damage  When you re  stuck  spin the wheels as little as possible  Don t  spin the wheels above 35 mph  55 km h  
175. linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first         Inspect engine accessory drive belt  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first        1 Drain  flush and refill cooling system  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first    see    Engine Coolant    in the Index for what  to use  Inspect hoses  Clean radiator   condenser  pressure cap and neck  Pressure  test the cooling system and pressure cap   An Emission Control Service      Continued            ee a       60 000 Miles  100 000 km   Continued       Replace spark plugs  An Emission Control  Service       Inspect spark plug wires  An Emission    Control Service       LI Replace air cleaner filter  Replace filter  more often under dusty conditions    An Emission Control Service    C Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines for damage  or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  damage  Replace parts as needed    An Emission Control Service t    7 18        For supercharged engines only  Check the  supercharger oil level and add oil as needed   or every 36 months  whichever occurs  first   See  Recommended Fluids and  Lubricants  in this section  An Emission  Control Service               63 000 Miles  105 000 km  66 000 Miles  110 000 km            Change engine oil and filter  or every     Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Serv
176. lity Grading            cz sese 6 37  Went Indicshigs   ool ee elcid   6 36  Wheel Reptapcement  einernie rm n 6 38  TOD OU MD ae see s ae eb ee eee he Vea Tent cee s x p at 1 32    9 10    Torque OCR    tee ee ene kk Oe t CE CE EC EIE DEA 2 26    Torque  Wheel Nut icons erra ra             Towing a Trailer                        4 30  Towins  Your VEO ioa               teens                     5 6  Pia the Pont                  er E aa 5 9  5 10  Prom CIE REM                                        Traction Contro  Svstem                   4 7  Traction Off Warning Light             ls                       4 8  Trailer Tongue Weight          4 32           TOWER i see erence rs E HG on E 4 30  BEARES LIII uua usa NE vam eaae rdg 4 33  Driving an Grades        VUE RA ESO                   e 4 35  Driving witha Trailer essere mI tmm m 4 34       HEAR CE        Pei          c Hen RUIT S M CPC SOHO 4 33                                              SLY a UNTO 4 36  Fark on Hil ool          EE Men 4 36  Safe MORNE a                  poe a GOR SLE      CR EA 4 33  Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires               4 32  TUFCOHBDEDES Lance dro acre RES HORDE E EE            4 35  Weight of a Trailer            erus Spa cilius 4 31  Transaxle Fluid  Automatic             mmn 6 20  Transmitters  Matching to Your Vehicle           2 6  Trip Odometer i e rre mee nn Evry 2 50  Trunk Ajar ieee ao ack a dina hah aas ala ee 2 67                               omit       n 90A      2 12  Tru
177. ll flash when the ignition is turned off  your radio will  not operate if stolen     When THEFTLOCK is activated  the radio will display  LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime the battery  power is removed  If your radio loses power for any  reason  you must unlock it with the secret code before it  will operate    To set the secret code  the following instructions explain  how to enter your secret code and activate the  THEFTLOCK system  It is recommended that you read  through all nine steps before starting the procedure     l  For your secret code  write down any number from  DOO to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from  the vehicle     3 14    Turn the ignition to the ACCESSORY or the RUN  position   Turn the radio off     NOTE  If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse  between any steps  the radio automatically reverts to         and you must start the procedure over at step 4     Press the   and 4 buttons together  Hold them down  until         shows on the display  Next you will use  the secret code number which you have written  down       Press the MIN button and              will appear on the    display     Press the MIN button again to make the last two  digits agree with your code     Press the HR button to make the first one or two  digits agree with your code     After you have confirmed that the code matches the  one you wrote down  press AM FM  The display will  show  rEP  to indicate that you need to repeat steps  5 7 to confirm your secret 
178. ll tell you how to use the jack and  change a tire          The equipment you ll need is in the trunk            5 22                          1  Turn the center retainer  holt on the spare tire  cover counterclockwise  to remove it  then lift the                  2    Kemowve the spare tire from the trunk        m    Open the jack storage cover hy twisting the knob  1 4 turn counterclockwise     4  Remowe the jack and wheel wrench     Next  remove the wheel or nut cap covers for your  particular vehicle              If you have steel  wheels with full    loosen each nut cap  using the wheel  wrench        Note  Nut caps are captured in the cover and will not  remove completely     plastic wheel covers           If you have aluminum  wheels with nut caps  remove them     If your have aluminum wheels and the center  cover hides the wheel nuts  remove the center  cover by using the flat end of the wrench to pry it  off  Do not drop the cover or lay it face down  it  could become scratched or damaged     Do not use a hammer or mallet on this type of  cover     5 24                                                                  TH N               6  Attach the wheel wrench to the Jack  and rotate the 7  Near each wheel well is a notch in the frame into  wrench clockwise to raise the jack head a few inches  which to put the jack head  The front notch is  IO inches back from the front wheel well  The rear  notch is 8 inches forward from the rear wheel well     The wheel wrench ha
179. low moist air from the intake ducts toward the  floor  not the windshield  It reduces the chance of  logging your windows  If you have the Electronic  Climate Control  the AUTO setting does this for you        NOTICE     Don t use a razor blade or something else sharp  on the inside of the rear window  If you do  you  could cut or damage the warming grid  and the  repairs wouldn t be covered by your warranty            Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects   This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle      F    C  Press this button to read the temperature in     When the engine idles for a long time  the exterior   degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius  temperature sensor may cause the system to blow air  that is too cool  Once the vehicle is moving again the  system will try to maintain the set temperature inside  your vehicle       When you start your vehicle and the EXT TEMP  display flashes for some time  the system may need  repair  See your Pontiac dealer           Audio Systems    The following pages describe the audio systems  available for your Pontiac  and how to get the best  performance from them  Please read about the system in    your vehicle     Setting the Clock for Stereo Radio       With the ignition on   press SET  The SET  indicator will appear on  the digital display far  five seconds     2  While set 1s displayed  press and hold SEEK until  the correct minute appears on the display     3  While set is displayed  press and hold SEEK unt
180. n at the same time    During your trip  check occasionally to be sure that the  load is secure  and that the lamps and any trailer brakes  are still working     Following Distance    Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you  would when driving your vehicle without a trailer  This  can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking  and sudden turns     Passing    You ll need more passing distance up ahead when  you re towing a trailer  And  because you re a good deal  longer  you ll need to go much farther beyond the  passed vehicle before you can return to your lane     Backing Up    Hold the bottom af the steering wheel with one hand   Then  to move the trailer to the left  just move that hand  to the left  To move the trailer to the right  move your  hand to the right  Always back up slowly and  if  possible  have someone guide you        4 34 EE       Making Turns    NOTICE     Making very sharp turns while trailering could    cause the trailer to come in contact with the  vehicle  Your vehicle could be damaged  Avoid  making very sharp turns while trailering     When you re turning with a trailer  make wider turns  than narmal       this so your trailer won t strike soft  shoulders  curbs  road signs  trees  or other objects   Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers  Signal well in  advance     Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer    When you tow a trailer  your vehicle has to have     different turn signal flasher and extra wiring  The green           on y
181. n emergency  so  keeping enough space between your vehicle and others  is important     And  of course  actual stopping distances vary greatly  with the surface of the road  whether it s pavement or  gravel   the condition of the road  wet  dry  icy   tire  tread  and the condition of your brakes     Avoid needless heavy braking  Some people drive   in spurts    heavy acceleration followed by heavy  braking    rather than keeping pace with traffic  This   is a mistake  Your brakes may not have time to cool  between hard stops  Your brakes will wear out much  faster if you do a lot of heavy braking  If you keep pace  with the traffic and allow realistic fallowing distances   you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking  That  means better braking and longer brake life     If your engine ever stops while you re driving  brake  normally but don t pump your brakes  If you do  the  pedal may get harder to push down  If your engine  staps  you will still have some power brake assist  But  you will use it when you brake  Once the power assist 1s  used up  it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal  will be harder to push           Anti Lock Brakes  ABS     Your Pontiac has an advanced electronic braking system  that wall help prevent a braking skid     This light on the  instrument panel will  come on briefly when  you start your vehicle        When you start your vehicle and begin to drive away   your anti lock brake system will check itself  You may  hear a momentary motor 
182. n you reinstall the full size wheel and tire  you  install the wheel cover or nut caps at this point        When re installing the full plastic wheel cover  align the  valve stem symbol  which 15 molded into the back side  of the cover  with the valve stem     Start the nut cap by pushing it onto the lug nut with the  wheel wrench  Tighten the plastic caps snug using the  wheel wrench  Then continue tightening 1 4 turn  Do  not overtighten        When re installing the The compact spare 15 for temporary use only  Replace  decorative nut caps on the compact spare tire with a full size tire   s soon as you  aluminum wheels  can  See    Compact Spare Tire  later in this section   tighten the caps snug  with the wheel  wrench  Then continue  tightening 1 4 turn for  plastic caps       1 8 turn  for steel caps        When re installing the center cover  do not use a  hammer or mallet  as they could damage the cover        16  Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as  possible  Store the jack and wheel wrench in their  compartment in the trunk               ___      B   M    Compact Spare Tire    Although the compact spare was fully inflated when  your vehicle was new  it can lose air after a time  Check  the inflation pressure regularly  It should      60 psi    420 kPa   After installing the compact spare on your  vehicle  you should stop as soon as possible and make  sure your spare tire is correctly inflated  The compact  spare is made to perform well at posted speed 
183. nce they may have to be scraped off later      abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear  window  an electric defogger element may be damaged   Any temporary license should not be attached across the  defogger grid        Cleaning the Outside of the  Windshield and Wiper Blades    If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield  washer  or if the wiper blade chatters when running  wax  or other material may be on the blade or windshield     Clean the outside of the windshield with GM  Windshield Cleaner  Bon Ami Powder     GM Part  No  1050011   The windshield is clean if beads do not  form when you rinse it with water     Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth  soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent  Then  rinse the blade with water     Wiper blades should be checked on    regular basis and  replaced when worn     Weatherstrips    Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last  longer  seal better  and not stick or squeak  Apply  silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six  months  During very cold  damp weather more frequent  application may be required   See  Recommended  Fluids and Lubricants  in the Index                dd    Cleaning the Outside of Your Pontiac    The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty  depth  of color  gloss retention and durability     Washing Your Vehicle    The best way to preserve your vehicle s finish is to keep  it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold  water     Don t
184. nce toll free number 15  staffed by a team of technically trained advisors who are  available 24 hours a day  365 days a year     We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing  minor repair information over the phone or making  arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest Pontiac  dealer     We will provide the following services for  3 years 36 000 miles  at no expense to you        Vehicle out of fuel     Keys locked in vehicle    9 Tow to nearest dealer for warranty    8 6    e Change a flat tire  Jump starts  Courtesy Transportation  For warranty repairs during  the Bumper to Bumper coverage period  interim  transportation may be available under the Pontiac  Courtesy Transportation Program  Please consult  your dealer for details  Jn Canada  please consult  your GM dealer for information on Courtesy  Transportation    We have quick  easy access to telephone numbers of the   following services depending on your needs       Hotel      Glass replacement      Rental vehicles or taxis      Police  fire department or hospitals   In many instances  mechanical failures are covered   under Pontiac   s comprehensive warranty  However    when other outside services are utilized  our advisors   will explain any payment obligations you might incur        For prompt and efficient assistance when calling  please  provide the following information to the advisor     Location of vehicle   Telephone number of your location  Vehicle model  year  and color  Mileage of vehicle  
185. nch Language Manual    Aux propri  taires canadiens  Vous pouvez vous procurer  un exemplaire de ce guide en francais chez votre  concessionaire ou au DGN Marketing Services Ltd    1500 Bonhill Rd   Mississauga  Ontario LST 1C7      Copyright General Motors Corporation 1994  All Rights Reserved                H  r    HR                                                                                            J                                    How to Use This Manual    Many people read their owner s manual from beginning  to end when        first receive their new vehicle  This  will help you learn about the features and controls for  your vehicle  In this manual  you ll find that pictures  and words work together to explain things quickly     Index    A good place to look for what you need is the Index in  the back of the manual  It s an alphabetical list of all  that   s in the manual  and the page number where you ll  find it     Safety Warnings and Symbols    You will find a number of safety cautions in this book   We use a box with gray background and the word  CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if  you were to ignore the warning           CAUTION     These mean there is something that  could hurt you or other people        In the gray caution area  we tell you what the hazard is   Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the  hazard  Please read these cautions  If you don t  you or  others could be hurt     You will also find a circle with
186. nd driving that  many people don t know  Medical research shows that  alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries  worse  especially injuries to the brain  spinal cord or  heart  This means that when anyone who has been  drinking    driver or passenger    is in    crash  that  person s chance of being killed or permanently disabled  is higher than if the person had not been drinking     CAUTION        Control of a Vehicle    You have three systems that make your vehicle go where  you want it to go  They are the brakes  the steering and  the accelerator  All three systems have to do their work  at the places where the tires meet the road        Sometimes  as when you re driving on snow or ice  it   s  easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires  and road can provide  That means you can lose control  of your vehicle        Braking    Braking action involves perception time and reaction  time     First  vou have to decide to push on the brake pedal   That s perception time  Then you have to bring up your  foot and do it  That s reaction tine     Average reaction time 15 about 3 4 of a second  But  that s only an average  It might be less with one driver  and as long as two or three seconds or more with  another  Age  physical condition  alertness  coordination   and eyesight all play a part  So do alcohol  drugs and  frustration  But even in 3 4 of a second  a vehicle  moving at 60 mph  100 km h  travels 66 feet  20 m    That could be a lot of distance in a
187. nd filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first     1 Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     SERVICED BY     ACTUAL MILEAGE       7 27    Maintenance Schedule          15 000 Miles  25 000 km     1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service     _  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first      22 500 Miles  37 500 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service     C  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first      C  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information           Maintenance Schedule II    30 000 Miles  50 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service     _  Lubricate the suspension and steering
188. ndex   50 you can sit up straight        The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on  the hips  just touching the thighs  In    crash  this applies  force to the strong pelvic bones  And you d be less  likely to slide under the lap belt  If you slid under it  the  belt would apply force at your abdomen  This could  cause serious or even fatal injuries  The shoulder belt  should go over the shoulder and across the chest  These  parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining  forces    The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or crash     Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster    Before you begin to drive  move the shoulder belt  adjuster to the height that is right for you           To move it down  squeeze the release handle and move  the height adjuster to the desired position  You can move  the adjuster up just hy pushing up on the bottom of the  release handle  After you move the adjuster to where  you want it  try to move it down without squeezing the  release handle to make sure it has locked into position     Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the helt  is centered on your shoulder  The belt should be away  from your face and neck  but not falling off your  shoulder     1 11        What s wrong with this         N CAUTION   You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is  too loose  In a crash you would move forward too  much  which could increase injury  The shoulder  belt should fit against your body              The shoulder belt 
189. ngers nir bug  they may not  work properly  You may have to replace the air    bag module in the steering wheel or both the air  bag module and the instrument panel for the  right front passengers air bag  Do not open or     break the air bag covers           Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac    Air bags affect how your Pontiac should be serviced   There are parts of the air bag system in several places  around your vehicle  You don t want the system to  inflate while someone is working on your vehicle  Your  Pontiac dealer and the 1995 Bonneville Service Manual  have information about servicing your vehicle and the  air bag system  To purchase a service manual  see   Service Publications  in the Index     The air bag system does not need regular maintenance             N CAUTION     For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is    turned off and the battery is disconnected  an air  bag can still inflate during improper service  You  can be injured if vou are close to an air bag when  it inflates  Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape   or yellow connectors  They are probably part of  the air bag system  Be sure to follow proper  service procedures  and make sure the person  performing work for you is qualified to do so             1 21    Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  Safety belts work for everyone  including pregnant  women  Like all occupants  they are more likely to be  seriously injured if they don t wear safety belts     A pregnant woman should wear a lap shou
190. ngine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service    Ll Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 12 months   whichever occurs first         Inspect engine accessory drive belt  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first         Drain  flush and refill cooling system        every 24 months  whichever occurs first    See  Engine Coolant    in the Index for what  to use  Inspect hoses  Clean radiator   condenser  pressure cap and neck  Pressure  test the cooling system and pressure cap   An Emission Control Service     Continued             Maintenance Schedule       90 000 Miles  150 000 km   Continued     1 Replace spark plugs  An Emission Control  Service       Inspect spark plug wires  An Emission  Control Service         Replace air cleaner filter  An Emission  Control Service    L  Inspect fuel tank  cap and lines  Inspect fuel  cap gasket for any damage  Replace parts as  needed  An Emission Control Service       1 For supercharged engines only  Check the    supercharger oil level and add oil as needed            every 36 months  whichever occurs first   See   Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  in this  section  An Emission Control Service        SERVICED BY             ACTUAL MILEAGE             97 500 Miles  162 500 km     O Change engine oil and filter  or every  12 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission
191. nk Release Remote 4 654625          uiu  2 12  Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator               2 31  Turn Signal Multifunction Lever            Pup em ie  i  Turn Signals When Towing ETE      4 35  Tor Sene 2552012      ium resi eue aid and 2 39       Underbody Maintenance cu eae sai EE Ix   6 46    Undetboodl L  mp        etree enean 6 10  Univer Theft Deterrent    ses conem 2 9  Variable EMG SEEMA            ee e 4 9  Vehicle Damage Warnings      4  45 casar nnn iv  Vehicle Identification Number       6 48  WENN LORIE Ses ii et ste            ae ous alsa seed 4 28  NVeluc SHORE BN                              COR XR      6 30  VOCI SUTIBUBE Lecce eraere their torn          voten V  Vehicle Control    cee ee ee ETE      eros Re 4 4  Viren  PERE NE euam eee eror  s d                             laa alee a wea                 3 6  Yeon Might Lice urne rrr EY                        4 15  Visor VAME MINOS Leere          raa 2 44  WER  SON sate ea Leste esuada diu uisi 2 44                    once EXE erase GS IESU MT ES 2 65       Warning Devices creer ES            5 2  Warning Flashers  Hazard            5 1  Warning Lights  Gages and Indicators                 2 5   Washer Fluid Message soui sonne n 2 67  Washing Your Vehicle                   CI OCDE 6 44  Water  Driving Through Deep           uai iesu au       WERDEN a             ca Ds enn rk ICI eC REESE 6 43  Wheel Nut Torque                       ay   8 30  6 55  Wess  Roper Den       cei eret tI cc 6 38  Wheel Repl
192. not to spill gasoline  Clean gasoline from  painted surfaces as soon as possible  See  Cleaning the  Outside of Your Pontiac  in the Index        Fuel Door Manual Release Checking Things Under the Hood    The following information tells you how to check fluids   lubricants and important parts under the hood     If your vehicle has a fuel  door lock  the fuel door can  be opened manually in case  of an electrical power  failure        Open the trunk  the release mechanism is on the driver s  side of the vehicle  at the top of the trunk compartment   Pull the tab rearward to release the fuel door        NOTICE  To open the hood  first pull the hood release handle    inside the vehicle   Prying on a locked fuel filler door can damage it     Use the remote fuel door manual release located  in the trunk           6 9       Then go to the front of the  vehicle and pull up on the  underhood release     Lift the hood           CAUTION   An electric fan under the hood can start up and    injure you even when the engine is not running   Keep hands  clothing and tools away from         underhood electric fan                  N CAUTION     Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and  start a fire  These include liquids like gasoline   oil  conlant  brake fluid  windshield washer and  other fluids  and plastic or rubber  You or others  could be burned  Be careful not to drop or spill  things that will burn onto a hot engine        Before closing the hood  be sure all the filler caps 
193. ns  you have a problem     What about gasoline with blending materials that  contain oxygen  oxygenates   such as MTBE or alcohol   MTBE is  methyl tertiary butyl ether   Fuel that is no  more than 15  MTBE is fine for your vehicle    Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol  Properly blended fuel  that is no more than 10  ethanol is fine for your vehicle     Methanol  is methyl or wood alcohol     NOTICE     Fuel that is more than 5  methanol is bad for  your vehicle  Don t use it  It can corrode metal  parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic    and rubber parts  That damage wouldn t be  covered under your warranty  And even at 5  or  less  there must be    cosolvents    and corrosion  preventers in this fuel to help avoid these problems           Gasolines for Cleaner Air    Your use of gasoline with deposit control additives will  help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and  fuel system  That helps keep your engine in tune and  your emission control system working properly  It s  good for your vehicle  and you ll be doing your part for  cleaner air     Many gasolines are now blended with oxygenates   General Motors recommends that you use gasolines with  these blending materials  such as MTBE and ethanol  By  doing so  you can help clean the air  especially in those  parts of the country that have high carbon monoxide  levels     In addition  some gasoline suppliers are now producing  reformulated gasolines  These gasolines are specially  designed to reduce ve
194. ntenance and what fluids and lubr icants t   use   Customer Assistance Information oc                 cian senescere ire rexa cec                     This section tells you how to contact Pontiac for assistance und how to get service publications   It also gives you information on    Reporting Safety Defects  on page 8 4    LX EEEE EEA EANAN ee T RuRRAR a ae e ce eee                                             9 1  Here s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual  You can use it to quickly find  samething you want to read                 GENERAL MOTORS  GM and the GM Emblem   PONTIAC and the PONTIAC Emblem are registered  trademarks of General Motors Corporation        This manual includes the latest information at the time it  was printed  We reserve the right to make changes in the  product after that time without further notice  For  vehicles first sold in Canada  substitute the name     General Motors of Canada Limited  for Pontiac Motor  Division whenever it appears in this manual    Please keep this manual in vour Pontiac  so it will be  there if you ever need it when you re on the road  If you  sell the vehicle  please leave this manual in it so the new  owner Can use it     Litho in U S A   Part No  10254645 B   First Edition        n       We support valuntary  technician certification     WE SUPPORT    VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN    CERTIFICATION THROUGH                    dur fo  AUTOMOTIVE  SERVICE  EXCELLENCE    For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a  Fre
195. nything  turn on the hazard warning  flashers     When you call  tell the towing service        That  if you have the SSE model  your vehicle  cannot be towed from the front with sling type  equipment     That your vehicle has front wheel drive     A  CAUTION        The make  model  and year of your vehicle      Whether you can still move the shift lever  To help avoid Injury to you or others   If there was an accident  what was damaged  Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is  When the                                        ras nur being towed   Mhen the towing service arrives  let the tow operator Novak Qe            Bunt safe QE posted ence tn    know that this manual contains detailed towing  instructions and illustrations  The operator may want t    see them     Never tow with damaged parts nat fully  secured    Never get under your vehicle after it has  been lifted by the tow truck    Always secure the vehicle on each side with  separate safety chains when towing it   Never use J hooks  Use T hooks instead           When your vehicle is being towed  have the ignition key    off  The steering wheel should be clamped in a  straight ahead position  with a clamping device  designed for towing service  Do not use the vehicle s  steering column lock for this  The transaxle should be in  NEUTRAL  N  and the parking brake released     Don t have your vehicle towed on the front wheels   unless you must  If the vehicle must be towed on the  front wheels  don t go more than
196. o reduce the possibility of theft  always activate the  theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle     2 10       PASS Key  II    Your vehicle is equi pped  with the PASS Key  II   Personalized Automotive  Security System  theft  deterrent system   PASS Key    Il is a passive  theft deterrent system     This means you don t have to do anything different to  arm or disarm the system  It works when you insert ar  remove the key from the ignition  PASS Key      uses a  resistor pellet in the ignition key that matches a decoder  in your vehicle     When the PASS Key  II system senses that someone is  using the wrong key  it shuts down the vehicle s starter  and fuel systems  For about three minutes  the starter  won t work and fuel won t go to the engine  If someone  tries to start your vehicle again or uses another key          during this time  the vehicle will not start  This  discourages someone from randomly trying different  keys with different resistor pellets in an attempt to make  a match     The ignition key must be clean and dry before it s  inserted in the ignition or the engine may not start  If the  engine does not start and the SECURITY light is on  the  key may be dirty or wet  Turn the ignition off     Clean and dry the key  Wait about three minutes and try  again  The security light may remain on during this  time  If the starter still won t work  and the key appears  to be clean and dry  wait about three minutes and try  another ignition key  At this time
197. oads    Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from  driving in flat or rolling terrain        If you drive regularly in steep country  or if you re  planning to visit there  here are some tips that can make  your trips safer and more enjoyable         Keep your vehicle in good shape  Check all fluid  levels and also the brakes  tires  cooling system and  transaxle  These parts can work hard on mountain  roads        Know how to go down hills  The most important    thing to know is this  let your engine do some of the  slowing down  Shift to    lower gear when you go            down a steep or long hill     Know how to go uphill  Shift down to DRIVE  D    This will help cool your engine and transaxle  and  you can climb the hill better        Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane  roads in hills or mountains  Don t swing wide or cut  across the center of the road  Drive at speeds that let  you stay in your own lane           As you go over the top of a hill  be alert  There could  he something in your lane  like a stalled car or an  accident            You may see highway signs on mountains that warn  of special problems  Examples are long grades   passing or no passing zones  a falling rocks area  or  winding roads  Be alert to these and take appropriate  action         4 23       Winter Driving       Include an ice scraper     small brush or broom     supply  of windshield washer fluid  a rag  some winter outer  Here are some tips for winter driving  clot
198. od  condition  see your Pontiac dealer     This part tells you the maintenance services you should  have done and when you should schedule them  If you  go to vour dealer for your service needs  you ll know  that GM trained and supported service people will  perform the work using genuine GM parts        The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in  Part D  Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses  these  All parts should be replaced and all necessary  repairs done before you or anyone else drives the  vehicle     These schedules are for vehicles that        carry passengers and cargo within recommended  limits  You will find these limits on your vehicle s  Tire Loading Information label  See  Loading Your  Vehicle  in the Index       are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal  driving limits        usc the recommended unleaded fuel  See    Fuel    in  the Index     Selecting the Right Schedule   First you ll need to decide which of the two schedules is  right for your vehicle  Here s how to decide which  schedule to follow     Maintenance Schedule    Schedule I Intervals       Schedule I Definition    Follow Maintenance Schedule I if any one of these is  true for your vehicle      Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles  8 to 16 km    This is particularly important when outside  temperatures are below freezing      Most trips include extensive idling  such as frequent  driving in stop and go traffic     Most trips are through dusty areas   You frequently
199. ode  the system will use RECIRC as necessary  to cool the air  Pressing the RECIRC will change the  operation to    manual mode and the air will recirculate  for 10 minutes  RECIRC will show in the display and  then return to EXT TEMP display    Km Defrost  Push the defrost button to clear the  windshield of fogging or icing in extremely humid or  cold conditions  If you select defrost from AUTO  the  system will control the fan speed  Use the fan button to  adjust the fan speed and the TEMP button to adjust the  air temperature for your comfort          Rear Window Defogger  The lines you see on the  rear window warm the glass  Press the button to start  warming your window              3 5    After 10 minutes  it will go off by itself  or pressing the Ventilation Tips  button again during the heating cycle will turn it off  If  you need additional warming time  push the button  again  The system will then operate for five minutes  before going off by itself         Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice  snow  or  any other obstruction  such as leaves   The heater  and defroster will work better  reducing the chance  of fogging your windows     Do not attach a temporary vehicle license  tape or decals  across the defogger grid on the rear window        When you enter a vehicle with Standard Climate  Control in cold weather  select a heater function that  provides air through the floor ducts  then turn the fan  to HI for a few moments before driving away  This  will h
200. on number    VIN  shows the code letter for your engine  You will  find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel    See  Vehicle Identification Number  in the Index      Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or  higher  It should meet specifications ASTM D4814 in  the United States and CGSB 3 5 92 in Canada  These  fuels should have the proper additives  so you should not  have to add anything to the fuel     In the United States and Canada  it   s easy to be sure you  get the right kind of gasoline  unleaded   You ll see  UNLEADED right on the pump  And only unleaded  nozzles will fit into your vehicle s filler neck     Be sure the posted octane is at least 87  If the octane 15  less than 87  you may get a heavy knocking noise when  you drive  If it   s bad enough  it can damage your engine     If you re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you  still hear heavy knocking  your engine needs service   But don t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when  you re accelerating or driving up    hill  That s normal   and you don t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid    of pinging  It s the heavy  constant knock that means  you have a problem    What about gasoline with blending materials that  contain oxygen  oxygenates   such as          or alcohol   MTBE is  methyl tertiary butyl ether   Fuel that is no  more than 15  MTBE is fine for your vehicle    Ethanol is ethyl or grain alcohol  Properly blended fuel  that is no more than 10  ethanol is 
201. ons into memory   6  on AM and 12 on FM  This is done by using the six  pushbuttons    through 6  on each radio band               or FM2     1  Press AM FM to select the radio band    2  Tune the station you want to store using the TUNE  knob or SEEK button    3  Press and hold one of the pushbuttons  1  2  3  4  5 or  6  until the display shows SET  The radio will mute  until SET appears  After SET appears on the display   release the button  The station is now preset and will  return whenever you press the button    4  Repeat steps 1 3 for each of six AM  six FMI and  six FM2 stations     3 10    BAL  Press lightly on the BAL knob  It will spring out  to make it easier to adjust  Turn the knob to balance the  sound between the left and right speakers  You may  push the knob back in when you are done     FADE  Press lightly on the FADE knob  It will spring  out to make it easier to adjust  Turn the knob to the right  to move the sound to the front speakers  Turn the knob  to the left to move the sound to the rear speakers  You  may push the knob back in when you are done     TREBLE  Slide the TREBLE lever to the right to  increase treble or to the left to decrease it  If a station is  weak or noisy  decrease the treble     BASS  Slide the BASS lever to the right to increase  bass or to the left to decrease it     EQUALIZER  Option   If vour sound system has an  equalizer  you can boost the bass  emphasize a voice in     song  brighten the treble    your equalizer gives you 
202. ons provided with the cleaning  cassette     Please note that cassette tape adapter kits for portable  CD players will not work in your cassette player  These  adapters will cause the radio to display an error and the  adapter cassette will be ejected     3 19    Compact Discs Care    Handle discs carefully  Store them in their original cases  or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight  and dust  If the surface of a disc is soiled  dampen     clean  soft cloth in a mild  neutral detergent solution and  clean it  wiping from the center to the edge     Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling  disces  Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the  edge of the hole and the outer edge     Fixed Mast Antenna    The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes  without being damaged  If the mast should ever become  slightly bent  you can straighten it out by hand  If the  mast is badly bent  as it might be by vandals  vou should  replace it     Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still  tightened to the fender     3 20    Power Antenna Mast Care    Your power antenna will  look its best and work well    if it s cleaned from time to  time        Cleaning the antenna mast    l  Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna to  full mast extension    2  Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or  equivalent solvent        3  Wipe cloth over the mast sections  removing any  dirt  NOTICE     4  Wipe dry with clean cloth before re
203. onths   whichever occurs first      39 000 Miles  65 000 km         Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service        Maintenance Schedule I  42 000 Miles  70 000 km    45 000 Miles  75 000 km        Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first     C  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information         Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service        Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving  in dusty conditions  Replace filter if  necessary  An Emission Control Service     ACTUAL MILEAGE       SERVICED BY        ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY        7 14       Maintenance Schedule I      48 000 Miles  80 000 km  50 000 Miles  83 000 km       Change engine oil and filter  or every  _  Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter  3 months  whichever occurs first   if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or  An Emission Control Service  more of these conditions     _  Lubricate the suspension and steering   In heavy city traffic where the outside  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking temperature regularly reaches 90  F  brak
204. ontrol System  in    the Index   To Erase Speed Memory    When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition  or  shift into PARK  P   your cruise control set speed  memory 1s erased        Lamp Controls    Parking Lamps  Pull the  switch to the first stop       turn on the     e Parking Lamps   e Side Marker Lamps  e Taillamps  b    Instrument Panel Lamps    Headlamps  Pull the switch out all the way to tum on  the headlamps  together with        Parking Lamps   e Side Marker Lamps   e Taillamps   e Instrument Panel Lamps    Push the switch in all the way to turn all the lamps off                          oer    Lamps On Reminder    If you open the driver s door while leaving the lamps on  and the ignition off  you will hear    warning tone     Daytime Running Lamps  Canada Only     Daytime Running Lamps  DRL  make it easier to see  the front of your vehicle during the day  DRL can be  helpful in many different driving conditions  hut they  can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn  and before sunset    A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the  DRL work  so be sure it isn t covered  The DRL system  will make your low beam headlamps come on at     reduced brightness when        The ignition 15 on      The headlamp switch is off  and     The transaxle is not in PARK  P      When the DRL are on  only your low beam headlamps  will he on  The taillamps  sidemarker and other lamps  won t he on  Your instrument panel won t be lighted either     When
205. op of  your vehicle     If any one of these is true for your vehicle  then you  need to change your oil and filter every 3 000 miles   5        km  or 3 months    whichever comes first    See  Change Oil Indicator  in the Index      If none of them is true  change the oil and filter every  7 500 miles  12 500 km  or 12 months     whichever  comes first     Engine Coolant Heater    An engine coolant heater can be a big help if you have  to park outside in very cold weather  0 F    18      or  colder  If your vehicle has this option  see  Engine  Coolant Heater  in the Index     What to Do with Used Oil    Did you know that used engine oil contains certain  elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could  even cause cancer  Don t let used oil stay on your skin  for very long  Clean your skin and nails with soap and  water  or a good hand cleaner  Wash or properly throw  away clothing      rags containing used engine oil   See  the manufacturer s warnings about the use and disposal  of oil products      Used oil can be a real threat to the environment  If you  change your cwn oil  be sure to drain all free flowing oil  from the filter before disposal  Don   t ever dispose of oil  by putting it in the trash  pouring it on the ground  into  sewers  or into streams or bodies of water  Instead   recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil  If  you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil   ask your dealer  a service station or a local recycling  center
206. or clicking noise while this is  going on and you may even notice that your brake pedal  moves    little  This is normal  If there s    problem with  the anti lock brake system  the anti lock brake system  warning light will stay on     See  Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light  in the  Index     4 6       Here s how anti lock works  Let s say the road is wet   You re driving safely  Suddenly an animal jumps out in  front of you     You slam on the brakes  Here s what happens with ABS     A computer senses that wheels are slowing down  H one  of the wheels is about to stop rolling  the computer will  separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at the  rear wheels        The anti lock system can change the brake pressure  faster than any driver could  The computer is  programmed to make the most of available tire and  road conditions        You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard     As you brake  your computer keeps receiving updates on  wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly     Remember  Anti lock doesn t change the time you need  to get vour foot up to the brake pedal  If vou get too          close ta the vehicle in front of you  you won t have time  to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or  stops  Always leave enough room up ahead to stop  even  though you have anti lock brakes     To Use Anti Lock    Don t pump the brakes  Just hald the brake pedal down  and let anti lock work for you  You may hear a motor or  clicking noi
207. or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Service     C  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first     C  Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     ACTUAL MILEAGE                   BY       ACTUAL MILEAGE SERVICED BY           7 7          12 000 Miles  20 000 km     C  Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service    C Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first      15 000 Miles  25 000 km       Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service    Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving  in dusty conditions  Replace filter if  necessary  An Emission Control Service     ACTUAL MILEAGE   SERVICED BY            18 000 Miles  30 000 km  21 000 Miles  35 000 km      _  Change engine oil and filter  or every     Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Service         Lubricate the suspension an
208. ou add electrical  parts or accessories  you could change the way  the fuel injection system operates  Before adding  electrical equipment  check with your dealer  If    you don t  your engine might not perform  properly    If vou ever have to have your vehicle towed  see  the part of this manual that tells how to do it  without damaging your vehicle  See    Towing  Your Vehicle  in the Index        Driving Through Deep Standing Water    NOTICE   If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or  standing water  water can come in through your    engine s air intake and badly damage vour  engine  Never drive through water that is slightly  lower than the underbody of your vehicle  If you  can t avoid deep puddles or standing water  drive  through them very slowly         Engine Coolant Heater  Option     EP ULIS                In very cold weather  0  F    18  C  or colder  the engine  coolant heater can help  You ll get easier starting and  better fuel economy during engine warm up  Usually   the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of  four hours prior to starting your vehicle      To use the coolant heater          4    Turn off the engine   Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord     Plug it into a normal  grounded 110 volt outlet        CAUTION     Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet  could cause an electrical shock  Also  the wrong      kind of e cord could overheat and cause    a fire  You could be seriously injured  Plug the  cord into a properly g
209. ou are completely satisfied with your new  vehicle  Our experience has shown that  if a situation  arises where you feel your concern has not been  adequately addressed  the Customer Satisfaction  Procedure described earlier in this section is very  successful     There may be instances where an impartial third party  can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement  regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New  Vehicle Limited Warranty  To assist in resolving these  disagreements Pontiac voluntarily participates in BBB  AUTO LINE        BBB AUTO LINE is an out of court program  administered by the Better Business Bureau system to  settle disputes between customers and automobile  manufacturers  This program is available free of charge  to customers who currently own or lease    GM vehicle     If you are not satisfied after following the Customer  Satisfaction Procedure  you may contact the BBB using  the toll free telephone number  or write them at the  following address     BBB AUTO LINE    Council of Better Business Bureaus   4200 Wilson Boulevard   Suite 800   Arlington       22203   Telephone  1 800 955 5100  To file a claim  you will be asked to provide your name  und address  your Vehicle Identification Number  VIN    and a statement of the nature of your complaint   Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage  and  other factors     8 3    We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction  Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE  but you  may cont
210. our  washer fluid often  and add only the proper fluid  See     Windshield Washer Fluid    in the Index     2 64    Check Gages Warning Light  Option       This light will come on  briefly when you are  starting the engine        If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving   check your gages for fuel  coolant temperature  oil  pressure or voltage  This light will stay on if your engine  is not running        Fuel Gage    Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have  left  when the ignition is on  When the gage reads in the  yellow band  a warning chime will sound and the  CHECK GAGES warning light will go on  if you have  this option     Here are five things that some owners ask about  None  of these show a problem with your fuel gage                service station  the gas pump shuts off before  the gage reads full        It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the  gage indicated  For example  the gage may have  indicated the tank was half full  but it actually took a  little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill  the tank       The gage moves a little when you turn    corner   speed up  or make a hard stop       The gage doesn t go back to empty when you turn  off the ignition       lf you have the large span  220    gage  the needle  moves more for a given amount of fuel  This does  not indicate excessive fuel consumption  and 18  normal           Voltmeter  Option     You may have a voltmeter  unless you have the  supercharg
211. our instrument panel will flash whenever  you signal a turn or lane change  Properly hooked up   the trailer lamps will also flash  telling other drivers  you re about to turn  change lanes or stop    When towing a trailer  the green arrows on your  instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on  the trailer are burned out  Thus  you may think drivers          behind you are seeing your signal when they are not  It s  important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer  bulbs are still working     Your vehicle has bulb warning lights  When you plug a  trailer lighting system into your vehicle s lighting  system  its bulb warning lights may not let you know if  one of your lamps goes out  So  when you have a trailer  lighting system plugged in  be sure to check your  vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure  they re all working  Once you disconnect the trailer  lamps  the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one  of your vehicle lamps is out     Driving On Grades    Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start  down a long or steep downgrade  If you don t shift  down  you might have to use vour hrakes so much that  they would get hot and no longer work well    On a long uphill grade  shift down to DRIVE   D   and  reduce your speed to around 45 mph  70 km h  to  reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle  overheating     4 35       Parking on Hills    You really should not park your vehicle  with a trailer  attached  on a hill  
212. our left foot  the park brake pedal will  follow it to the release position    If you try to drive away with the parking brake on  the  brake light stays on and a chime sounds until you release  the parking brake or recycle the ignition           NOTICE     Driving with the parking brake on can cause   your rear brakes to overheat  You may have to  replace them  and you could also damage other  parts of your vehicle        If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill   see    Towing a Trailer  in the Index  That section shows  what to do first to keep the trailer from moving       2 23    Shifting Into PARK  P     A  CAUTION       It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if  the shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll     If you have left the engine running  the vehicle  can move suddenly  You or others could be  injured  To be sure your vehicle won t move  even  when you re on fairly level ground  use the steps  that follow  If you re pulling a trailer  see          Towing a Trailer  in the Index  m       2  Move the shift lever into PARK  P  position like  this   Steering Column Shift Lever    Pull the lever toward you     1  Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and  set the parking brake     404      PPPRoRR  M                        Move the lever up as far as it will go   Move the ignition key to LOCK     Remove the key and take it with you  If you can  walk away from your vehicle with the 
213. ous  Some  are toxic  Others can burst into flame if you strike     match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle  Some are  dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space   When you use anything from a container to clean your  Pontiac       sure to follow the manufacturer s warnings  and instructions  And always open vour doors or  windows when you re cleaning the inside     Never use these to clean your vehicle   Gasoline   Benzene   Naphtha   Carbon Tetrachloride   Acetone   Paint Thinner   Turpentine   Lacquer Thinner    Nail Polish Remover    They can all be hazardous    some more than  others    and they can all damage your vehicle  too     Don t use any of these unless this manual says you can   In many uses  these will damage your vehicle         Alcohol      Laundry Soap   e Bleach      Reducing Agents   Cleaning the Inside of Your Pontiac    Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose  dirt  Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean  damp cloth     Your Pontiac dealer has two GM cleaners  a   solvent type spot lifter and a foam type powdered   cleaner  They will clean normal spots and stains very   well  Do not use them on vinyl or leather    Here are some cleaning tips        Always read the instructions on the cleaner label       Clean up stains as soon as you can    before they set    e Use a clean cloth or sponge  and change to a clean area  often  A soft brush may be used if stains are stubbom    e Use solvent type cleaners in a well ventilated ar
214. passenger                                                               e D           How does an air bag restrain          moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions   even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or  the instrument panel  The air bag supplements the  protection provided by safety belts  Air bags distribute  the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s  upper body  stopping the occupant more gradually  But  air bags would not help you in many types of collisions   including rollovers and rear and side impacts  primarily  because an occupant s motion is not toward the air bag   Air bags should never be regarded as anything more  than    supplement to safety belts  and then only in  moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions     What will you see after an air bag inflates     After the air bag inflates  it quickly deflates  This occurs  so quickly that some people may not even realize the air  bag inflated  Some components of the air bag module in  the steering wheel hub for the driver s air bag  or the   instrument panel for the right front passenger s bag  will    be hot for a short time  but the part of the bag that comes    into contact with you will not be hot to the touch  There  will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the  deflated air bags  Air bag inflation will not prevent the  driver from seeing or from being able to steer the  vehicle  nor will it stop people from leaving the vehicle             CAUT
215. pitched warning sound when the brake pads are  worn and new pads are needed  The sound may come  and      or be heard all the time your vehicle 15 moving   except when you are pushing on the brake pedal  firmly       N CAUTION     The brake wear warning sound means that  sooner or later your brakes won t work well     That could lead to an accident  When you hear  the brake wear warning sound  have your vehicle  serviced           NOTICE     Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads  could result in costly brake repair        Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake  squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly  applied  This does not mean something is wrong with  your brakes     Your rear drum brakes don t have wear indicators  but if  you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise  have the rear  brake linings inspected  Also  the rear brake drums  should be removed and inspected each time the tires are  removed for rotation or changing  When you have the  front brakes replaced  have the rear brakes inspected   too     Brake linings should always be replaced as complete  axle sets   Brake Pedal Travel    See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to  normal height  or if there is a rapid increase in pedal  travel  This could be a sign of brake trouble     Brake Adjustment    Every time you apply the brakes moderately  with or  without the vehicle moving  your brakes adjust for wear     Replacing Brake System Parts    The braking system on    modern 
216. position for an air bag inflation  in a crash  Always wear your safety belt  even  with an air bag  The driver should sit as far back    as possible while still maintaining control of the  vehicle        CAUTION     An inflating air bag can seriously injure small  children  Always secure children properly in your  vehicle  To read how  see the part of this manual  called    Children    and the caution label on the  right front passenger s safety belt        There 15      air bag  readiness light on the  instrument panel  which    shows INFLATABLE  INFLATABLE   RESTRAINT     RESTRAINT    The system checks the air bag s electrical system for  malfunctions  The light tells you if there is an electrical  problem  See  Air Bag Readiness Light  in the Index  for more information                 M       1 17    How the Air Bag System Works       The right front passenger s air bag is in the instrument  panel on the passenger s side     Where is the air bag     The driver s air bag is in the middle of the steering  wheel     i EA F    S       CAUTION   Don t put anything on  or attach anything to  the  steering wheel or instrument panel  Also  don t  put anything  such as pets  or objects  between  any occupant and the steering wheel       instrument panel  If something is between an     occupant and an air bag  it could affect the  performance of the air bag    or worse  it could  cause injury              When should an air bag inflate     The air bag is designed to inflate in mode
217. r engine is  warm  the level should be up to FULL HOT or a little  higher     LOW COOLANT       If this light comes on  it means you re low on engine  coolant     6 23    To Add Coolant Radiator Pressure Cap  If you need more coolant  add the proper mix at the    coolant recovery tank       mE NOTICE        CAUTION   Turning the radiator pressure cap when the   engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and  scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly   With the coolant recovery tank  you will almost  never have to add coolant at the radiator  Never  turn the radiator pressure cap    even a   little    when the engine and radiator are hot     Your radiator cap is a 15 psi  105 kPa   pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to         prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage  from overheating  Be sure the arrows on the cap  line up with the overflow tube on the radiator  filler neck           When you replace your radiator pressure cap  an        cap is recommended               Thermostat  A conan mix at the recovery tank  but be careful not Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat            in the engine coolant system  The thermostat stops the    flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant  reaches a preset temperature      N CAUTION     You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot  engine parts  Coolant contains ethylene glycol   and it will burn if the engine parts are hot    enough  Don t spill coolant on a hot engine     U
218. radiator hose getting hot  Watch out for the  engine fans        By this time the coolant level inside the radiator  Hiller neck may be lower  If the level is lower  add  more of the proper mix through the filler neck until  the level reaches the base of the filler neck     8  Then replace the  pressure cap     At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to  flow out of the filler neck  reinstall the pressure cap  Be  sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this     5 19    If a Tire Goes Flat    it   s unusual for a tire to  blow out  while you re driving   especially if you maintain your tires properly  If air goes  out of a tire  it s much more likely to leak out slowly   But if you should ever have       blowout     here are a few  tips about what to expect and what to do     If a front tire fails  the flat tire will create a drag that  pulls the vehicle toward that side  Take your foot off the  accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly   Steer to maintain lane position  then gently brake to a  stop well out of the traffic lane     A rear blowout  particularly on a curve  acts much like a  skid and may require the same correction you d use in a  skid  In any rear blowout  remove your foot from the  accelerator pedal  Get the vehicle under control by  steering the way you want the vehicle to go  It may be  very bumpy and noisy  but you can still steer  Gently  brake to a stop  well off the road if possible     If a tire goes flat  the next part 
219. radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to  it       help avoid hearing loss or damage        Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting     e Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably  and clearly         NOTICE       Before you add any sound equipment to your  vehicle    like a tape player  CB radio  mobile  telephone or two way radio    be sure you can  add what you want  If you can  it s very  important to do it properly  Added sound  equipment may interfere with the operation of  your vehicle s engine  Delco radio or other  systems  and even damage them  And  your  vehicle s systems may interfere with the  operation of sound equipment that has been  added improperly    5o  before adding sound equipment  check with  your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules  covering mobile radio and telephone units                      Cassette Tape Player Care    A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause  reduced sound quality  ruined cassettes  or a damaged  mechanism  Cassette tapes that are not stored in their  plastic cases away from contaminants  direct sunlight   and extreme heat may not operate properly or may cause  premature failure of the tape player     Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may  degrade over time  Always make sure that the cassette  tape is in good condition and that the tape player is clean  before you have your tape player serviced     Your tape player should be cleaned each month or after  every 50
220. railer and  then the tongue  separately  to see if the weights are  proper  If they aren t  you may be able to get them right  simply hy moving some items around in the trailer     Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires    Be sure your vehicles tires are inflated to the  recommended pressure for cold tires  You ll find these  numbers on the Certification label at the rear edge of the  driver s door or see  Loading Your Vehicle    in the  Index  Then be sure you don t go over the GVW limit  for your vehicle  including the weight of the trailer  tongue        Hitches    It s important to have the correct hitch equipment   Crosswinds  large trucks going by  and rough roads are a  few reasons why you ll need the right hitch  Here are  some rules to follow        Will you have to make any holes in the body of your  vehicle when you install a trailer hitch  If you do   then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove  the hitch  If you don t seal them  deadly carbon  monoxide  CO  from your exhaust can get into your  vehicle  see    Carbon Monoxide    in the Index   Dirt  and water can  too        The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for  hitches  Do not attach rental hitches or other  bumper type hitches to them  Use only     frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the  bumper        Safety Chains    You should always attach chains between your vehicle  and your trailer  Cross the safety chains under the tongue  of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the 
221. rake Master Cylinder 2 2 05 4 4 se cease cee eee anna G 2   Brake Pedal Travel   ESSERE E   6 20   Brake System Parts  Replacing                    D 6 29   Brake System Warning         rcc          Brake Transaxle Shift Interlock                  2 21  1 39                   wey nid aa aes eae                          6 28   Brake  Parking                                                       2 23   Brakes  Anti Lock        E LITE  4 6                   oru eda des aA E            eg 4 33          MUT ITI E E TIC A               4 5   Braking  In Emergencies               2 va danke  4 9   Break In  New Vehicle  200 0005    csica ee eee deca ees 2 13   BTSI  Brake Transaxle Shift         Joe 2 27  7 39   Bulb Replacement          eite ee     6 53  a 45 ln soosi ennea tenenan aeea A ENE 6 32  Headlamps        T POMPIERS 6 30                           esaet          ut Va    6 31    9 2    Canadian Roadside Assistance                      8 7  Capacities and Specifications                        6 55  Carbon Monoxide             vee 2 13  2 28  4 27  4 33  Lan BOIdE e loe iri usc                     d  Cassette Tape and CD Errors                         3216  Cassette          Player  Care of              3 19  CD Errors   UU EET pr sre            Center Passenger Position                  p ze se wie V E 2  1923  Certification Tire Label 20 5    leere be ewes   4 28          REI aa a eee pete eee ebbe pee ry    35  Chams Doe 0n                MM                ae eee mrt 5 22
222. rate to severe  frontal or near frontal erashes  The air bag will inflate  only if the impact speed is above the system s designed   threshold level   If your vehicle goes straight into     wall that doesn t move or deform  the threshold level is  about 9 to 15 mph  14 to 24 km h   The threshold level  can vary  however  with specific vehicle design  so that  it can be somewhat above or below this range  If your    vehicle strikes something that will move or deform  such    as    parked car  the threshold level will be higher  The  air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers  side  impacts  or rear impacts  because inflation would not  help the occupant        In any particular crash  no one can say whether an       bag should have inflated simply because of the damage  to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were   Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and  the vehicle s deceleration  Vehicle damage is only one  indication of this     What makes an air bag inflate     In a frontal or near frontal impact of sufficient severity   the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle 15  suddenly stopping as a result of a crash  The sensing  system triggers a chemical reaction of the sodium azide  sealed in the inflator  The reaction produces nitrogen  gas  which inflates the air bag  The inflator  air bag  and  related hardware are all part of the air bag modules  packed inside the steering wheel and in the instrument  panel in front of the right front 
223. re driving  in dusty conditions  Replace filter if  necessary  An Emission Control Service     1 Rotate tires  See    Tire Inspection and  Rotation    in the Index for proper rotation  pattern and additional information     SERVICED BY                      7 3     Maintenance Schedule I       81 000 Miles  135 000 km  84 000 Miles  140 000 km    1 Change engine oil and filter  or every 1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first   3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service  An Emission Control Service     C  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first      DATE ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY          Maintenance Schedule I    87 000 Miles  145 000 km       Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service     ACTUAL MILEAGE    SERVICED BY      DATE          90 000 Miles  150 000 km     1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first     An Emission Control Service        Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 months   whichever occurs first         Inspect engine accessory drive belt  or  every 24 months  whichever occurs first         Drain  flush and refill cooling system  or  every 24 mont
224. re s a problem     If the light and chime come on while you are driving   pull off the road and stop carefully  You may notice that  the pedal is harder to push  Or  the pedal may go closer       to the floor  It may take longer to stop  If the light is still  on  have the vehicle towed for service   See    Towing  Your Vehicle  in the Index         CAUTION   Your brake system may not be working properly    hehehe aes  CRINE MUERE RIDE       with the brake system warning light on can lead  to an accident  If the light is still on after you ve  pulled off the road and stopped carefully  have      the vehicle towed for service     The brake system warning light will also come on when  you set your parking brake  and it will stay on if your  parking brake doesn t release fully  If you try to drive  off with the parking brake set  a chime will also come       until you release the parking brake  If the light and  chime stay on after your parking brake is fully released   it means you have a brake problem                    283    Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light    With the anti lock brake  system  this light will come  on when you start your  engine and may stay on for  several seconds  That s  normal  If the light doesn t  come on  have it fixed so it  will be ready to warn you if  there is    problem        If the light stays on  turn the ignition off  Or  if the light  comes on when you re driving  stop as soon as possible  and turn the ignition off  Then start the engine
225. repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable  from the cold  But do it as little as possible  Preserve the  fuel as long as you can  To help keep warm  you can get  out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises  every half hour or so until help comes     Loading Your Vehicle           TIRE LOADING INFORMATION  OCCUPANTS VEHICLE CAP  WT   LBS  KG        FRT  CTR  RR  TOTAL                       LOADING  amp  GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE   CAPACITY WEIGHT XXX COLD TIRE   TIRE SIZE SPEED PRESSURE  RTG PSI KPa          FRT   RR   SPA   IF TIRES ARE HOT  ADD 4PSI  28         SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL  INFORMATION           Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it  may properly carry  The Tire Loading Information label  found on the rear edge of the driver s door tells you the    proper size  speed rating and recommended inflation  pressures for the tires on your vehicle  It also gives you  important information about the number of people that  can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can  carry  This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight  and includes the weight of all occupants  cargo  and all  nonfactory installed options     MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP             GVWR  GAWRFRT GAWR RR    THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLI    CABLE U S  FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE  SAFETY  BUMPER  AND THEFT PREVENTION  STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF  MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE        The other lahel is the Certification label  found on the  rear edge of 
226. road  if it becomes separated from the hitch  Instructions  about safety chains may be provided by the hitch  manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer  Follow the  manufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety  chains and do not attach them to the bumper  Always  leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig   And  never allow safety chains to drag on the ground     Trailer Brakes    Does your trailer have its own brakes  Be sure to read  and Follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so  you ll be able to install  adjust and maintain them  properly    Because you have anti lock brakes  do not try to tap into  your vehicles brake system  If you do  both brake  systems won t work well  or at all     4 33    Driving with a Trailer    Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience   Before setting out for the open road  you ll want to get  to know your rig  Acquaint yourself with the feel of  handling and braking with the added weight of the  trailer  And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are  driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as  responsive as your vehicle is      itself    Before you start  check the trailer hitch and platform   and attachments   safety chains  electrical connector   lamps  tires and mirror adjustment  If the trailer has  electric brakes  start your vehicle and trailer moving and  then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure  the brakes are working  This lets vou check your  electrical connectio
227. rounded three prong  110 volt outlet  If the cord won t reach  use a       2 17    NOTICE     After you ve used the coolant heater  be sure to    store the cord as it was before to keep it away  from moving engine parts  If you don t  it could  be damaged     How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged  in  The answer depends on the weather  the kind of oil  you have  and some other things  Instead of trying to list  everything here  we ask that you contact your Pontiac  dealer in the area where you ll be parking your vehicle   The dealer can give you the best advice for that  particular area        Shifting the Automatic Transaxle    Your automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located  on the console between the seats or on the steering  column           RN Oe2 1       There are several different positions for your shift lever        PARK  P   This locks your front wheels  It s the best  position to use when you start your engine because your  vehicle can t move easily      N CAUTION     It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the  shift lever is not fully in PARK  P  with the  parking brake firmly set  Your vehicle can roll   Don t leave your vehicle when the engine is  running unless you have to  If you have left the    engine running  the vehicle can move suddenly   You or others could be injured  To be sure your  vehicle won t move  even when you re on fairly  level ground  always set your parking brake and  move the shift lever to PARK  P    See    Shi
228. ructions say     3  Pick up the latch plate  and run the lap and shoulder  portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or  around the restraint  The child restraint instructions  will show you how     If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child s face or  neck  put it behind the child restraint                         HIE    4  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button is 5  Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the  positianed so you would be able to unbuckle the retractor to set the lock   safety belt quickly 1f you ever had to           1 34                           B        Q MP am    6  To tighten the helt  feed the lap belt into the retractor  while you push down on the child restraint        7  Push and pull the child restraint in different  directions to be sure it is secure     To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle s  safety belt and let it go back all the way  The safety belt  will move freely again and he ready to work for an adult  or larger child passenger        Securing    Child Restraint in the Center  Rear Seat Position       You ll be using the lap belt        CAUTION    A child in    child restraint in the center front seat  can he badly injured by the right front passenger  air bag if it inflates  Never secure a child restraint    in the center front seat  It s always better to  secure a child restraint in the rear seat  You may   however  secure a forward facing child restraint  in the right front passenger seat  b
229. ruise control  you can  maintain a speed of about  25 mph  40 km h  or more  without keeping your foot     on the accelerator  This can  really help on long trips        Cruise control does not work at speeds below about  25 mph  40 km h      When you apply your brakes  the cruise control shuts off      N CAUTION        Cruise control can be dangerous where you  can t drive safely at a steady speed  So   don t use your cruise control on winding    roads or in heavy traffic    Cruise control can be dangerous on  slippery roads  On such roads  fast changes  in tire traction can cause needless wheel  spinning  and you could lose control  Don t  use cruise control on slippery roads        If your vehicle 15 in cruise control when the optional  traction control system begins to limit wheel spin  the  cruise control will automatically disengage   See   Traction Control System  in the Index  When road  conditions allow you to safely use it again  you may turn  the cruise control back on                    To Set Cruise Control    1  Move the cruise control switch to ON     A CAUTION       Ifyou leave your cruise control switch on when  you re not using cruise  you might hit a button and    go into cruise when you don t want to  You could be  startled and even lose control  Keep the cruise    control switch OFF until you want to use it        2  Get up to the speed you want    3  Push in the SET button  at the end of the lever  and release it        4  Take your foot off the accelera
230. running  be sure your vehicle is in PARK  P  and your   parking brake is firmly set before you leave it  After   you ve moved the shift lever into the PARK  P    position  hold the regular brake pedal down  Then  see if   you can move the shift lever away from PARK  P    without first pulling it toward you  or  if you have the   console shift lever  without first pushing the button   If   you can  it means that the shift lever wasn t fully locked   into PARK  P            2 26       Shifting Out of PARK  P  Parking Over Things That Burn    Your Pontiac has a hrake transaxle shift interlock  You  have to fully apply your regular brake before you can  shift from PARK  P  when the ignition is in the RUN  position  See    Automatic Transaxle    in the Index        If you cannot shift out of PARK  P   ease pressure on  the shift lever  push the shift lever all the way into  PARK  P  as you maintain brake application  Then  move the shift lever into the gear you want  If you ever  hold the brake pedal down but still can t shift out of  PARK  P   try this     1  Turn the key to OFF  Open and close the driver s  door to turn off the Retained Accessory Power  feature  if you have it     2  Apply and hold the brake until the end af Step 4   3  Shift to NEUTRAL   N    4  Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you            CAUTION   5  Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can  i           Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust    over papers  leaves  dry grass or oth
231. s     The net isn t for larger  heavier loads  Store them in the  trunk as far forward as you can     You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when  you re not using it        Sunglasses Storage  Option     Some models have a storage  compartment for glasses in     your overhead console   Press the release button to  lower the door  Place your  glasses inside the door  To  close the door  raise it and  press it into position           To block out glare  you can swing down the visors  You  can also remove them from the center mount and swing  them to the side  while the auxiliary sunshade remains to  block glare from the front     Visor Vanity Mirrors       Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror    If your vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors   the lamps come on when you open the cover  You can  adjust the brightness of the lamps by moving the switch        Tu          Express Open Sunroof  Option     Your express open sunroof provides an airy  spacious feel  to your Vehicle s interior and can also increase ventilation  Itincludes asliding glass panel and a sliding sunshade  The  control switch will work only when the ignition is on or  during retained accessory power  if you have that option   See    Retained Accessory Power  in the Index     Press the control switch  rearward and release it to  open the glass panel and  sunshade  If you want to stop  the sunroof in a partially  open position  lightly press  the switch again  Press the  switch rearward 
232. s  If your  tread is badly worn  or if your tires have  heen damaged  replace them                          _   __  mA0A0ATD0CON0NNNNhnnnno       VVVOV0Onnvnn T c                 613    Inflation   Tire Pressure    The Tire Loading Information label which is on the rear  edge of the driver s door shows the correct inflation  pressures for your tires  when they re cold   Cold   means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three  hours or driven no more than a mile     NOTICE     Don t let anyone tell vou that underinflation or  overinflation is all right  Its not  If your tires  don t have enough air  underinflation  you can    Too much flexing  Too much heat  Tire overloading  Bad wear  Bad handling  Bad fuel economy   NOTICE   Continued        NOTICE    Continued     If your tires have too much air  overinflation    you can get        Unusual wear      Bad handling      Rough ride      Needless damage from road hazards        When to Check  Check your tires once a month or more     Don t forget your compact spare tire  It should be at  60 psi  420 kPa      How to Check    Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire  pressure  Simply looking at the tires will not tell you the  pressure  especially if you have radial tires    which  may look properly inflated even if they re underinflated   If vour tires have valve caps  be sure to put them back        They help prevent leaks hy keeping out dirt and  moisture        6 34               Tire Inspection and Rotation    
233. s the engine code   This code will help you identify your engine   specifications  and replacement parts        Service Parts Identification Label    You ll find this label on your spare tire cover  It s very  helpful if you ever need to order parts  On this label is        your VIN     the model designation       paint information  and    a list of all production options and special equipment   Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle     Add On Electrical Equipment    NOTICE     Don t add anything electrical to your Pontiac    unless vou check with your dealer first  Some    electrical equipment can damage vour vehicle and  the damage wouldn t be covered by your warranty   Some add on electrical equipment can keep other  components from working as they should        Your vehicle has an air bag system  Before attempting to  add anything electrical to vour Pontiac  see  Servicing  Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac  in the Index        BN m         H    Fuses and Circuit Breakers    The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from  short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit  breakers     The main fuse panel is located to the left of the steering  wheel  under the instrument panel     Snap olf the cover to reveal the fuses  You ll find a fuse  puller clipped to the inside of the cover  Place the wide  end of the fuse puller over the plastic end of the fuse   Squeeze the ends over the fuse and pull it out     Spare fuses are located in the slots labele
234. s these 8 and 10 inch distances  stamped on the handle  Use the wheel wrench to  measure to the notch by flipping the socket into the  handle  then measuring from the socket end of the  wrench               8  Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits 9  Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts  but  firmly on the ridge in the vehicle s frame nearest the don t remove them   flat tire  Do not raise the vehicle yet  Put the compact  spare tire near you        CAUTION   Getting under    vehicle when itis jacked up is             QUE         NOTICE   Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly  positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow    the vehicle to fall off the jack  Be sure to fit the  jack lift head into the proper location before  raising your vehicle        11  Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire        10  Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench  clockwise in the jack  Kaise the vehicle far enough  off the ground so there is enough room for the spare  tire to fit                CAUTION     Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts  If you    Z  CAUTION    Rust or dirt on the wheel  or on the parts to  which it is fastened  can make the wheel nuts  become loose after a time  The wheel could come  off and cause an accident  When you change a    do  the nuts might come loose  Your wheel could  fall off  causing a serious accident        wheel  remove any rust or dirt from the places  where the wheel attaches to the vehicle 
235. s will go off after about 20 seconds  or when you  start your engine  These lamps will also go on when you  press amy button on the optional remote keyless entry  transmitter     If a door is left           your interior lamps will turn off  after ten minutes to save your battery     Trunk Lock    To unlock the trunk from the outside  insert the door key  and turn it        Remote Trunk Release  Option     Press the trunk release  button located below the  driver s door armrest to     release the trunk lid     The ignition may be on or off and the transaxle must be  in PARK  P  or NEUTRAL  N   The system also works  with the Remote Keyless Entry System         N CAUTION       It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid   open because carbon monoxide  CO  gas can     come into your vehicle  You can t see or smell   CO  It can cause unconsciousness and even death    If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if   electrical wiring or other cable connections must   pass through the seal between the body and the   trunk lid      Make sure all windows are shut      Turn the fan on your heating or cooling     system to its highest speed with the setting  on ECON or VENT  That will force outside  air into your vehicle  See    Comfort  Controls  in the Index       If you have air outlets on or under the  instrument panel  open them all the way    See  Engine Exhaust  in the Index                              New Vehicle    Break In       NOTICE    Your modern Pontiac doesn t ne
236. safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter        Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging  weather  and chemical fallout that can take their toll over    period  of years  You can help to keep the paint finish looking  new by keeping your Pontiac garaged or covered  whenever possible     Aluminum Wheels  If So Equipped     Your aluminum wheels have a protective coating similar  to the painted surface of your vehicle  Don t use strong  soaps  chemicals  chrome polish  abrasive cleaners or  abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could  damage this coating  After rinsing thoroughly  a wax  may be applied     NOTICE     If you have aluminum wheels  don   t use an    automatic car wash that has hard silicon carbide    cleaning brushes  These brushes can take the  protective coating off your aluminum wheels                    Tires  To clean your tires  use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner     When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe  off any overspray or splash from painted surfaces   Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish     Sheet Metal Damage    If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal  repair or replacement  make sure the body repair shop  applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired       replaced to restore corrosion protection     Finish Damage   Any stone chips  fractures or deep scratches in the finish  should be repaired right away  Bare metal will corrode  quickly and may develop into a major repair 
237. same laws of physics when driving on curves  The  traction of the tires against the road surface makes it  possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn  the front wheels  If there s no traction  inertia will keep  the vehicle going in the same direction  If you ve ever  tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice  you ll understand this     The traction you can get in a curve depends on the  condition of your tires and the road surface  the angle at  which the curve is banked  and your speed  While you re  in a curve  speed is the one factor you can control     Suppose you re steering through a sharp curve  Then you  suddenly accelerate  Both control systems    steering and  acceleration    have to do their work where the tires meet  the road  Unless you have traction control and the system  is on  adding the sudden acceleration can demand too  much of those places  You can lose control     What should you do if this ever happens  Ease up on the  accelerator pedal  steer the vehicle the way you want it  to go  and slow down     Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should  adjust your speed  Of course  the posted speeds are  based on good weather and road conditions  Under less  favorable conditions you ll want to go slower              If you need to reduce your speed as you approach     curve  do it before you enter the curve  while your front  wheels are strarght ahead     Try to adjust your speed so you can  drive  through the  curve  Maintain a reasonable  ste
238. se 1065  Hush Panel  Lower Floor Lighting      168  Ash Tray     MITT 161    Capacities and Specifications for Engine Code K  L36  and Code 1  L67     Automatic Transaxle AT 4T60E  Overdrive   When draining or replacing torque converter  more fluid may be needed     Pan Removal and Replacement        rete                    6 1 2 quarts 6 00 L  Aftex Complete Overhanl occa                                  11 quarts 10 50 L  Coning SIME         eaa n id em ste Fa e Pa OR e evel          ia a             13 quarts 12 00 L  Air Conditioning Refrigerant  R134a                              See refrigerant charge label under hood     Nat all air conditioning refrigeranis are the same  If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant  be sure the  proper refrigerant      used  If vou re not sure  ask your Pontiac dealer  For additional information see your  Warranty and  Owner Assistance Information    booklet     Engine Crankcase            ECT ERA  OI UU UTE TT 5 quarts 4 75 1   Oil change with filter change   FUNDI ren  lr Ses                   oa eae eae E are 020273 18 gallons 68 00      Power Steering           HEI CD                                     MESI Pee eae        NI   pint 0 50 L  Complete Syslem esser ne SES EIR TUER SITAS Ea TUF   1 2 pints 0 75 1   Tire Pressures  Sizes                  MERE CAMPI SEES Sce Tire  Loading Information label on  driver s door   Wheel Nut Torque              Ves ORT es eee in a 100 Th  ft  140            NOTE  All capac
239. se during a hard stop  but this is normal     Traction Control System  Option     Your vehicle may have a traction control system that  limits wheel spin  This is especially useful in slippery  road conditions  The system operates only if it senses  that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or  beginning to lose traction  When this happens  the  system works the front brakes and reduces engine power   by shutting off fuel injectors and managing engine  spark  to limit wheel spin     You may feel the system working  or you may notice  some noise  but this is normal  If your vehicle is in  cruise control when the traction control system begins to  limit wheel spin  the cruise control will automatically  disengage  When road conditions allow you to safely  use    again  you may re engage the cruise control   See   Cruise Control  in the Index      4 7      When the system is on  the  TRACTION OFF warning     light will come on to let you  know if there s a problem  with your traction control  system     TRACTION OFF       see  Traction Control System Warning Light  in the  Index  When this warning light is on  the system will not  limit wheel spin  Adjust your driving accordingly     The traction control system automatically comes on  whenever you start your vehicle  To limit wheel spin   especially in slippery road conditions  you should  always leave the system on  But you can turn the  traction control system off if you ever need to   You  should turn the system off i
240. sentinel  switch clockwise from OFF        Depending on how dark it becomes outside  the twilight  sentinel turns your headlamps on automatically  when  they re needed  Avoid covering the sensor located near  the windshield  by the defroster outlet    otherwise your  headlamps will stay on           The twilight sentinel will keep your headlamps on for   s  long as three minutes to light your way when you leave  your vehicle  Rotate the twilight sentinel switch to MAX  fora three minute delay  Rotate it the other way to  reduce the delay    Also  it s possible that your headlamps might go out if  you drove from a dark area into a bright area  such as     lighted parking lot  If this happens  turn on your  headlamps with the regular headlamp switch     Fog Lamps                         ee The switch for your fog    lamps is in the overhead  console    An indicator light in the switch will glow when the fog   lamps are switched       Your headlamps must be on low  beams  or your parking lamps must be on  for your fog   lamps to work     2 39    Front Reading Lamps Rear Reading Lamps    These lamps and the interior  courtesy lamps will come  on when you          the  doors              These overhead lamps and  LO  the interior courtesy lamps    will come on when you  open the doors     To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed  To turn on the reading lamp when the door is closed   press either switch  Press it again to turn the lamp off  slide the switch up  Slide it 
241. sher    At the top of the turn signal multifunction lever there s a  paddle with the word PUSH on it  To spray washer fluid    NOTICE     e When using concentrated washer fluid     on the windshield  push the paddle for less than     second  The wipers will clear the window and there  either stop or return to your preset speed  For more  washer cycles  push and hold the paddle  Remember   driving without washer fluid can be dangerous     bad  mud splash can block your vision  You could hit another  vehicle or go off the road  Check your washer fluid level  often     some models have a WASHER FLUID warning  that  indicates if the fluid level in the windshield washer 15  low  See    Low Washer Fluid Warning Light  in the  Index        CAUTION   In freezing weather  don t use your washer until    the windshield is warmed  Otherwise the washer    fluid can form ice on the windshield  blocking  your vision        follow the manufacturer s instructions far  adding water    Don t mix water with ready to use washer  fluid  Water can cause the solution to freeze  and damage your washer fluid tank and    other parts of the washer system  Also   water doesn t clean as well as washer fluid     Fill your washer fluid tank only 3 4 full  when it s very cold  This allows for  expansion  which could damage the tank if  it is completely full    Don t use radiator antifreeze in your  windshield washer  It can damage your  washer system and paint        2 33    Cruise Control  Option     With c
242. shows how to use your  jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely     ooren             ee    Air Inflator System The air inflator comes with a kit that includes a 20 foot  hose and an air pressure gage  as well as instructions and  special adapters for inflating things like an air mattress  or    basketball     Z  CAUTION   Inflating something too much can make it    explode  and you or others could be injured  Be  sure to read the inflator instructions  and inflate  any object only to its recommended pressure        Some vehicles have an air inflator for use in maintaining  proper air pressure for the tires  The air inflator is  located in the trunk  The ON switch will work even with  the ignition off        5 21    Changing a Flat Tire      a tire goes flat  avoid further tire and wheel damage  by driving slowly to a level place  Turn on your hazard  warning flashers      N CAUTION     Changing a tire can cause an injury  The vehicle  can slip off the jack and roll over you or other  people  You and they could be badly injured   Find a level place to change your tire  To help    prevent the vehicle from moving    1  Set the parking brake firmly    2  Put the shif t lever in PARK  P     3  Turn off the engine   To be even more certain the vehicle won t move   you can put blocks at the front and rear of the  tire farthest away from the one being changed   That would be the tire on the other side of the  vehicle  at the opposite end                  The following steps wi
243. sing either maximum setting will not cause  the system to heat or cool any faster     Pressing the AUTO button will display the requested  temperature  fan speed and air delivery mode for 5  seconds  then change to display the outside air  temperature  Be careful not to put anything over the  sensor located in the middle of the instrument panel near  the windshield  or over the sensor in the grille above the  radio  These sensors are used by the automatic system to  regulate temperature     The exterior temperature display sensor is in front of the  car  near the radiator  This displayed temperature is most  accurate when the vehicle is moving  During stops  or  while idling  the display shows the previous driving  temperature for best system control     To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather  the system  will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available     The length of delay depends on outside air temperature   engine coalant temperature  and time since the engine  was last started  Pushing the fan button will override this  delay and change the fan to a selected single speed     If you leave your vehicle  the control setting is  remembered the next time you start your engine        MANLAL OPERATION  The system can be used in  various ways to manually adjust the air delivery mode or  the fan speed    Pressing the MODE button will cause air to be delivered  through the floor  middle or windshield outlets and stay  in the mode selected until the mode button or the
244. ss where in the country you are driving                  The compass shows the zone number in use each time  you turn your key on  This is shown above  The number  is turned off after afew seconds     The compass remembers your zone  so you only have to  change it if you drive to a new zone on the map  The  compass adjusts only    small amount for each zone  so  you may not notice a difference if you drive from one  zone to the next one  until you cross several zones        Choosing vour zone number  l ocate your zone  number on the map above  If your number is different  than the one shown when you turn the key on  follow  the steps to change your zone number      If you live on the line  you can pick the zone area vou  are most likely to drive in   In Alaska use Zone 9 or 10   In Hawai use Zone 7         2 69       Changing your zone number            bh  E    S oa    2 70    Fress and hold the MODE button until zone and the  zone number appear     Release the MODE button   Press the MODE button until your number appears     In a few seconds  the zone number and ZONE turn  off  and the new zone number is remembered by the  compass     Calibrating the compass  All electronic compasses  need to know the magnetic profile of your car  This is  called calibration and is done automatically by your  compass  But  the feature is available if you would like  to manually calibrate     Sometimes  strong magnetic fields can affect the  compass  If the CALIBRATE light comes on as shown 
245. tance  And be especially careful when vou pass    Hydroplaning doesn t happen often  But it can if your another vehicle  Allow yourself more clear room  tires haven t much tread or if the pressure in one or ahead  and he prepared to have your view restricted  more is low  It can happen if a lot of water is standing on by road spray    the road  If you can see reflections from trees  telephone           Have good tires with   r tread depth   See  Tires   poles  or other vehicles  and raindrops  dimple  the vtto                                   water s surface  there could be hydroplaning   Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds  There  just isn t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning  The  best advice 1s to slow down when it is raining        AW lI                                  NH    City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is the       amount of traffic on them  You ll want to watch out for  what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to  traffic signals     Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving     e Know the best way to get to where you are going   Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown  part of the city just as you would for a cross country  trip       Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most  large cities  You ll save time and energy   See the  next part   Freeway Driving         Treat a green light as a warning signal  A traffic light  is there because the corner is busy enough to need it   When
246. tem  ABS  helps  avoid only the braking skid     4 13    Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving    e Drive defensively       Don t drink and drive       Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the  glare from headlamps behind you    e Since you can L see as well  you may need to slow  down and keep more space between you and other  vehicles    e Slow down  especially on higher speed roads  Your  headlamps can light up only so much road ahead      Inremote areas  watch for animals     If you re tired  pull off the road in a safe place and    rest        Night driving is more dangerous than day driving  One  reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired    by  alcohol or drugs  with night vision problems  or by  fatigue           4 14        Night Vision   No one can see as well at night as in the daytime  But as  we get older these differences increase  A 50 year old  driver may require at least twice as much light to see the  sume thing at night as a 20 year old     What you do in the daytime can also affect your night  vision  For example  if you spend the day in bright  sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses  Your eyes will  have less trouble adjusting to night  But if you re  driving  don t wear sunglasses at night  They may cut  down on glare from headlamps  but they also make a lot  of things invisible     You can be temporarily blinded by approaching lights  Tt  can take a second or two  or even several seconds  for  your eyes to readjust to
247. the  freedom to adjust seven separate frequencies of sound to  your individual taste  Move a lever up to emphasize a  frequency  move it down to de emphasize  Start with the  levers in the middle position  then adjust each lever as  you like        Cassette Tape Player  Option      With the radio turned on  insert a tape into the cassette  door  The cassette symbol will appear in the upper left  comer of the display  While the tape is playing  an arrow  will appear next to the cassette symbol to indicate that  the top or bottom of the tape is playing  Once the tape 15  playing  use the VOL  BAL  FADE  TREBLE and  BASS just as you would for the radio     Your tape player will automatically adjust the  equalization for high bias  metal and CrO gt   tapes     Your tape player is designed to work best with tapes that  are 30 to 46 minutes long on each side  Tapes longer  than that may not work well in this tape player     If Cln  Clean  appears on the display when vou insert  your cassette tape  your cassette player needs to be  cleaned  It will still play cassette tapes  but it should be  cleaned to prevent damage to your cassette tapes and the  cassette tape player  See  Cassette Tape Player Care   later in this section  After you have cleaned the cassette  tape player  press and hold EJECT for five seconds to  reset the Cin indicator  The radio will display         to  show that the clean feature has been reset        Cassette Player Control Features     TAPE PLAY  If you have
248. the driver s door  It tells you the gross  weight capacity of your vehicle  called the GV WR   Gross Vehicle Weight Rating   The GVWR includes the  weight of the vehicle  all occupants  fuel and cargo        SG                 Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle  or the Gross  Axle Weight Rating  GAWR  for either the front or rear  axle    And  if you do have    heavy load  you should spread it  out  Don t carry more than 176 165               in your trunk       A  CAUTION     Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the    GVWR  or either the maximum front or rear  GAWR  If you do  parts on your vehicle can    break  or it can change the way your vehicle     handles  These could cause you to lose control   Also  overloading can shorten the life of your  vehicle          AX CAUTION     Things you put inside vour vehicle can strike and  injure people in a sudden stop or turn  or in a  crash      Put things in the trunk of your vehicle  Ina  trunk  put them as far forward as you can      Try to spread the weight evenly   Never stack heavier things  like suitcases   inside the vehicle so that some of them are  above the tops of the seats   Don t leave an unsecured child restraint in  your vehicle   When you carry something inside the  vehicle  secure it whenever vou can   Don t leave a seat folded down unless you  need to                  4 29    Towing a Trailer       CAUTION    If you don t use the correct equipment and drive  properly  you can lose control when you pull 
249. the right front seat  Before you secure  a forward facing child restraint  always move the  front passenger seat as far back as it will go  Or   secure the child restraint in the rear seat        1 31    Wherever you install it  be sure to secure the child  restraint properly     Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move  around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in  the vehicle  Be sure to properly secure any child  restraint in your vehicle    even when no child is in it        If your child restraint has a top strap  it should be  anchored     If you need to have an anchor installed  you can ask  your Pontiac dealer to put it in for you  If you want to  install an anchor yourself  your dealer can tell you how  to do           1 32    For cars first sold in Canada  child restraints with a top  strap must be anchored according to Canadian Law   Your dealer can obtain the hardware kit and install it for  you  or you may install it yourself using the instructions  provided in the kit    Use the tether hardware kit available from the dealer   The hardware and installation instructions were  specifically designed for this vehicle     Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear  Outside Seat Position       You ll he using the lap shoulder belt  See the earlier part  about the top strap if the child restraint has one     1  Put the restraint on the seat  Follow the instructions  for the child restraint     2  Secure the child in the child restraint as the  inst
250. these jobs  Make sure any necessary repairs are  completed at once     Restraint Systems    Now and then  make sure all your belts  buckles  latch  plates  retractors  anchorages and reminder systems are  working properly  Look for any loose parts or damage   If you see anything that might keep a restraint system  from doing its job  have it repaired     Steering  Suspension and Front Wheel   Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection    Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering  system for damaged  loose or missing parts  signs af  wear  or lack of lubrication  Inspect the power steering  lines and hoses for proper hookup  binding  leaks   cracks  chafing  etc  Clean and then inspect the drive  axle boot seals for damage  tears or leakage  Replace  seals 1f necessary        Exhaust System Inspection    Inspect the complete exhaust system  Inspect the body  near the exhaust system  Look for broken  damaged   missing or out of position parts as well as open seams   holes  loose connections  or other conditions which  could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let  exhaust fumes into the vehicle  See  Engine Exhaust  in  the Index     Throttle Linkage Inspection    Inspect the throttle linkage for interference or binding   and for damaged or missing parts  Replace parts as  needed  Accelerator and cruise control should not be  lubricated     Brake System Inspection    Inspect the complete system  Inspect brake lines and  hoses for proper hookup  binding  leaks  cra
251. they all working  Are the lenses clean   Tires  They are vitally important to a safe   trouble free trip  Is the tread good enough for    long distance driving  Are the tires all inflated to the  recommended pressure     e Weather Forecasts  What s the weather outlook  along your route  Should you delay your trip a short  time to avoid a major storm system         Maps  Do you have up to date maps     eee 121       Highway Hypnosis    Is there actually such a condition as  highway  hypnosis   Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel   Call it highway hypnosis  lack of awareness  or  whatever     There is something about an easy stretch of road with the  same scenery  along with the hum of the tires on the road   the drone of the engine  and the rush of the wind against  the vehicle that can make you sleepy  Don t let it happen  to you  If it does  your vehicle can leave the road in less  than a second  and you could crash and be injured    What can you do about highway hypnosis  First  be   aware that it can happen    Then here are some tips       Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated  with a  comfortably coal interior       Keep your eyes moving  Scan the road ahead and to  the sides  Check your rearview mirrors and your  instruments frequently         f you get sleepy  pull off the road into a rest  service   or parking area and take a nap  get some exercise  or  both  For safety  treat drowsiness on the highway as  an emergency     4 22       Hill and Mountain R
252. til the HUD  image is no brighter than necessary  To turn the HUD  off  slide the HUD dimmer control all the way down     If the sun comes out  or it becomes cloudy  or if you  turn on your headlamps  you may need to adjust the  HUD brightness using the HUD dimmer control   Polarizing sunglasses could make the HUD image  harder to see     AN CAUTION     If the HUD image is too bright  or too high in  your field of view  it may take you more time to  see things you need to see when it s dark outside   Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed  low in your field of view             Pushing the optional ENG MET  English Metric  button  on the instrument panel cluster will switch the HUD  speedometer from English  conventional  to metric  units  or back again        Da c                                 Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove  any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of  the HUD image     Spray household glass cleaner on a soft  clean cloth   Wipe the HUD lens gently  then dry it  Do not spray  cleaner directly on the lens  because the cleaner fluid  could leak inside the unit if you do    If you can t see the HUD image when the ignition is on   check to see if        The headlamps are on   Anything 15 covering the HUD unit           The HUD dimmer control is adjusted correctly   e The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height        A fuse in the fuse panel may be blown  See    Fuses  and Circuit Breakers  in the Index     If the 
253. tions to be sure it is secure   If you have the choice  a child should sit next to     window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and  get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide     To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle s  safety belt and let it go back all the way    The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to  work for an adult or larger child passenger                            1 39    Accident statistics show that children are safer if they    are restrained in the rear seat  But they need to use the A C AUTION          P       safety belts properly     e Children who aren t buckled up can be thrown out in Never do this   a crash  Here two children are wearing the same belt  The  belt can   t properly spread the impact forces  In  a  crash  the two children can he    usher   together  and seriously injured  A belt must be used        only one person at atime     e Children who aren t buckled up can strike other  people who are        Q  What if a child is wearing    lap shoulder belt   but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is  very close to the child s face or neck     A  Move the child toward the center of the vehicle  but  be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s  shoulder  so that in a crash the child s upper body  would have the restraint that belts provide  If the  child is sitting in a rear seat outside position  see     Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  in the Index  If  the child is so smal
254. to Check    Check oil level every 30 000 miles  50 000 km  or every  36 months     What Kind of Oil to Use    Sce    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  in the Index  and use only the recommended oil     How to Check and Add Oil    Check oil only when the engine is cold  Allow the  engine to cool 2 to 3 hours after running     Z  CAUTION   If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while    the engine is hot  pressure may cause hot oil to  blow out of the oil fill hole  You may be burned   Do not remove the plug until the engine cools        Remove the wiring harness shield     Clean the area around the oil fill plug before  removing it     Remove the oil fill plug using a 3 16 Allen wrench     The oil level is correct when it just reaches the  bottom of the threads of the inspection hole     Replace the oil plug with the O ring in place  Torque  to 10       88 Ib  in       Replace wiring harness shield     6 19    Automatic Transaxle Fluid    When to Check and Change   A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level  is when the engine oil is changed  Refer to the  Maintenance Schedule to determine when to change your    fluid  See    Scheduled Maintenance Services  in the Index     How to Check    Because this operation can be a little difficult  you may  choose to have this done at your Pontiac dealer Service  Department    If you do it yourself  be sure to follow all the  instructions here  or you could get a false reading on the  dipstick     NOTICE     Too mu
255. to the shoulder while  you re driving    If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  pavement  recovery should be fairly easy  Ease off the  accelerator and then  if there is nothing in the way  steer  so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement   You can turn the steering wheel up to 1 4 turn until the  right front tire contacts the pavement edge  Then turn  your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway     OFF ROAD RECOVERY       Passing   The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on     two lane highway waits for just the right moment   accelerates  moves around the vehicle ahead  then goes  back into the right lane again  A simple maneuver     Not necessarily  Passing another vehicle on a two lane  highway 15 a potentially dangerous move  since the  passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming  traffic for several seconds  A miscalculation  an error in  judgment  or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can  suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the  worst of all traffic accidents    the head on collision     So here are some tips for passing     e  Drive ahead     Look down the road  to the sides  and  to crossroads for situations that might affect your  passing patterns  If you have any doubt whatsoever  about making a successful pass  wait for a better time     e Watch for traffic signs  pavement markings  and lines   If vou can see    sign up ahead that might indicate a  turn or an intersection  delay your pass 
256. tor pedal           To Resume a Set 5peed    Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed  and then you apply the brake  This  of course  shuts off  the cruise control  But you don t need to reset        Once you re going about  25 mph  40 km h  or more   you can move the cruise      control switch from ON to     R A  resume accelerate      for about half a second     You ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay  there  Remember that if you hold the switch at R A  longer than half a second  the vehicle will keep going  faster until you release the switch or apply the brake   You could be startled and even lose control  So unless  you want to go faster  don t hold the switch at R A     2 35    To Increase Speed While Using Cruise  Control    There are two ways to go to a higher speed  Here s the  first         Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed      Push the button at the end of the lever  then release    the button and the accelerator pedal  You ll now  cruise at the higher speed    Here s the second way to go to a higher speed       Move the Cruise switch from ON to        Hold it  there until you get up to the speed you want  and  then release the switch       To increase your speed in very small amounts  move  the switch to R A for less than half a second and then  release it  Each time you do this  vour vehicle will go  about 1 mph  1 6 km h  faster    The accelerate feature will only work after you have set   the cruise control speed 
257. tracting  Before entering an automatic car wash  turn off    5  Make the antenna go up and down by turning the your radio to make the power antenna go down   radio or ignition on and off  This will prevent the mast from possibly getting    damaged  If the antenna does not go down when  you turn the radio off  it may be damaged or  need to be cleaned  In either case  lower the  antenna by hand by carefully pressing the  antenna down     6  Then repeat if necessary     NOTICE     Don t lubricate the power antenna  Lubrication  could damage it        If the mast portion of your antenna is damaged  you can  easily replace it  See your dealer for a replacement kit  and follow the instructions in the             3 21    NOTES                      Y Section 4 Your Driving and the Road          Here you ll find information about driving on different  kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions  We ve  also included many other useful tips on driving     Defensive Driving  The best advice anyone can give about driving 15  Drive  defensively     Please start with a very important safety device in your  Pontiac  Buckle up   See    Safety Belts  in the Index      Defensive driving really means  be ready for anything    On city streets  rural roads  or freeways  it means     alWays expect the unexpected        Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be  careless and make mistakes  Anticipate what they might  do  Be ready for their mistakes     Rear end collisions are abo
258. trol your speed as you go down steep  mountain roads  but then you would also want to use  your brakes off and on     NOTICE     Don t drive in SECOND  2  for more than 5  miles  8 km   or at speeds over 55 mph  88 km h    or you can damage your transaxle  Use    or    DRIVE  D  as much as possible    Don t shift into SECOND  2  unless you are going  slower than 65 mph  105 Km h   or you can  damage your engine        FIRST  1   This position gives you even more power   but lower fuel economy  than SECOND  2   You can  use it on very steep hills  or in deep snow or mud  Jf the  selector lever is put in FIRST  1   the transaxle won t  shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly  enough        NOTICE     If your front wheels can   t rotate  don t try to  drive  This might happen if you were stuck in  very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid  object  You could damage your transaxle    Also  if vou stop when going uphill  don t hold  your vehicle there with only the accelerator  pedal  This could overheat and damage the  transaxle  Use your brakes or shift into PARK  P   to hold your vehicle in position on a hill                                Performance Shifting  Option        Press PERFORM SHIFT to allow the transaxle to shift  at higher engine speeds  increasing acceleration  performance  An indicator light on the switch will glow  when performance shifting is in operation    Downshifts will occur at a lower percentage of  accelerator application while you
259. turn signal  If you have  the Driver Information Center  it will tell you if you  have    burned out bulb  See  Driver Information  Center  in the Index     If a bulb is burned out  replace it to help avoid an  accident  If the green arrows don t go on at all when you  signal a turn  check the fuse and for burned out bulbs   Sce  Fuses and Circuit Breakers  in the Index     2 31    fram you to the LO position  For high speed wiping      The windshield wipers are turn the band further  to HI  To stop the wipers  move  controlled by turning the the hand to OFF   band marked WIPER     Windshield Wi pers For steady wiping at low speed  turn the hand away       The wiper speed may be set for a long or short delay  between wipes  This can be very useful in light rain or  snow  Turn the band to choose the delay time  The  closer to LO  the shorter the delay     Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor      circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools  Clear  away snow or ice to prevent an overload     Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent    For    single wiping cycle  turn the band to MIST  Hold you from seeing well enough to drive safely  To avoid  it there until the wipers start  then let go  The wipers will damage  be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper  stop after one cycle  If you want more cycles  hold the blades hefore using them  If your blades do become  band on MIST longer  damaged  get new blades or blade inserts       e a    Windshield Wa
260. uel tank         and lines for damage   L Inspect engine accessory drive belt  or or leaks  Inspect fuel cap gasket for any  every 24 months  whichever occurs first   damage  Replace parts as needed        Drain  flush and refill cooling system  or An Emission Control Service  T  every 24 months  whichever occurs first   C  For Supercharged engines only  Check the  See    Engine Coolant    in the Index for what supercharger oil level and add oil as needed  to use  Inspect hoses  Clean radiator   or every 36 months  whichever occurs  condenser  pressure cap and neck  Pressure first   See    Recommended Fluids and  test the cooling system and pressure cap  Lubricants    in this section  An Emission  An Emission Control Service  Contral Service        Continued   eh            Maintenance Schedule I    30 000 Miles  50 000 km   Continued  33 000 Miles  55 000 km    1 Rotate tires  See  Tire Inspection and     Change engine oil and filter  or every  Rotation  in the Index for proper rotation 3 months  whichever occurs first    pattern and additional information  An Emission Control Service     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY     ACTUAL MILEAGE  SERVICED BY                                     36 000 Miles  60 000 km     1 Change engine oil and filter  or every  3 months  whichever occurs first    An Emission Control Service     C  Lubricate the suspension and steering  linkage  transaxle shift linkage  parking  brake cable guides and underbody contact  points and linkage  or every 6 m
261. uid      Chassis lubricant  GM Pan    No  1052497 or equivalent  or  lubricant meeting requirements of  NLGI Grade 2  Category LB or  GC LB       GM Hydraulic Power Steering  Fluid  GM Part No  1052884 or  equivalent       DEXRON   III Automatic  Transmission Fluid     Lubricate with Multi Purpose  Lubricant  GM Part No  12345120   or synthetic SAE 5W 30 engine oil          Supercharger     windshield       Supercharger Oil  GM Part         12345982   See  Supercharger    Oil  in the Index    Automatic  Transaxle Shift  Linkage    Engine oul     Floor Shift Engine oil  E  Linkage    Chassis lubricant  GM Part   No  1052497 or equivalent  or  lubricant meeting requirements of  NLGI Grade 2  Category LB or  GC LB    GM Optikleen    Washer Solvent   GM Part No  1051515  or  equivalent     Chassis  Lubrication    Washer Solvent        USAGE  Hood Latch  Assembly    FLUID LUBRICANT                        a  Pivots and  Spring  Anchor    a  Engine oil     b  Chassis lubricant  GM Part  No  1052497 or equivalent  or  lubricant meeting requirements  of NLGI Grade 2  Category LB  or GC LB       Release Pawl                   Engine oil or Lubriplate Lubricant     GM Part No  1050109      Hood and Door    Hinges  Fuel  Door Hinge   Rear  Compartment  Lid Hinges            Dielectric Silicone Grease  GM    Part No  12345579 or equivalent      Weatherstrip  Conditioning    See    Replacement Parts  in the Index for recommended  replacement filters  valves and spark plugs        Part E  M
262. ut only with  the seat moved all the way back     See the earlier part about the top strap if the child  restraint has ane               P 1       Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch 4  Run the vehicle s safety belt through or around the  plate and pulling it along the belt  restraint  The child restraint instructions will show  you how        2      Put the restraint on the seat  Follow the instructions  for the child restraint  5  Buckle the belt  Make sure the release button 15  positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the    3  Secure the child in the child restraint as the safety belt quickly if vou ever had to     instructions say   6  To tighten the belt  pull its free end while you push  down on the child restraint        1 36    7  Push and pull the child restraint in different    directions to be sure it is secure  If the child restraint A C AUTION     isn t secure  turn the latch plate over and buckle it       again  Then see if it is secure  If it isn t  secure the A child in a rear facing child restraint can be  restraint in a different place in the vehicle and  eriouslv in uret ifthe right front passenger s air  contact the child restraint maker for their advice bag inflates  This is because the back of a    about how to attach the child restraint properly  rear facing child i restraint would be very close to  To remove the child restraint  just unbuckle the vehicle s          safety belt  It will be ready to work for an adult or larger  ch
263. ut the most preventable of  accidents  Yet they are common  Allow enough  following distance  It s the best defensive driving  mancuver  in both city and rural driving  You never  know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake  or turn suddenly                   SS 4  1    Drunken Driving    Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is  a national tragedy  It   s the number one contributor to the  highway death toll  claiming thousands of victims every  year    Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a   vehicle        ludgment      Muscular Coordination  e Vision      Atientiveness    Police records show that almost half of all motor  velucle related deaths involve alcohol  In most cases   these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking  and driving  In recent years  some 18 000 annual motor  vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use  of alcohol  with more than 300 000 people injured     Many adults    by some estimates  nearly half the adult  population    choose never to drink alcohol  so they  never drive after drinking  For persons under 21  it s  against the law in every U S  state to drink alcohol   There are good medical  psychological and  developmental reasons for these laws     4 2    The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem  is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive  But  what if people do  How much is    too much    if the  driver plans to drive  It s a lot less than many might  thin
264. uts on your vehicle can be dangerous  Tt  could affect the braking and handling of your  vehicle  make your tires lose air and make you lose    control  You could have a collision in which you or  others could be injured  Always use the correct  wheel  wheel bolts  and wheel nuts for replacement              NOTICE   The wrong wheel can also cause problems with  bearing life  brake cooling  speedometer odometer  calibration  headlamp aim  bumper height  vehicle    ground clearance  and tire or tire chain clearance  to the body and chassis                      Used Replacement Wheels        N CAUTION   Putting    used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous   You can t know how it s heen used or how many  miles it s been driven  It could fail suddenly and    cause an accident  If you have to replace a wheel  use    new GM original equipment wheel         Tire Chains        NOTICE   Use tire chains only where legal and only when  you must  Use only SAE Class  S  type chains  that are the proper size for your tires  Install  them on the front tires and tighten them as  tightly as possible with the ends securely  fastened  Drive slowly and follow the chain  manufacturer s instructions  If you can hear the  chains contacting vour vehicle  stop and retighten  them  If the contact continues  slow down until it  stops  Driving too fast or spinning the wheels   with chains on will damage your vehicle                       6 39    Appearance Care    Remember  cleaning products can be hazard
265. vehicle 15 complex  Its  many parts have to be of top quality and work well  together if the vehicle is to have really good braking   Vehicles we design and test have top quality GM hrake  parts in them  as your Pontiac does when it is new   When you replace parts of your braking system    for  example  when your brake linings wear down and you  have to have new ones put in     be sure you get new  genuine GM replacement parts  If vou don t  your  brakes may no longer work properly  For example  if  someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your  vehicle  the balance between your front and rear brakes  can change     for the worse  The braking performance  you ve come to expect can change in many other ways if  someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts     Battery    Every new Pontiac has a Delco Freedom   battery  You  never have to add water to one of these  When it s time  for a new battery  we recommend    Delco Freedom    battery  Get one that has the replacement number shown  on the original battery s label                         JA                          Vehicle Storage Halogen Bulbs  If you re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or  more  take off the black  negative     cable from the  battery  This will help keep your battery from running  down         N CAUTION     Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and   can burst if you drop or scratch the hulb  You or    others could be injured  Take special care when   handling and disposing of 
266. vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible     In the section Problems on the Road   this manual  explains what to do  See  Engine Overheating  in the  Index        Low Coolant Warning Light    If you have this light and it  comes       your system may  be low on coolant and the  engine may overheat     Check to see if the level is low at the recovery tank  and  add coolant if necessary  If the level 1s not low  have  your low coolant warning system serviced  See  Engine  Coolant  in the Index    The LOW COOLANT warning light will also come on  when you turn on the ignition  but your engine 1s not  running    s    check to show you it is working  If it  doesn t come on then  have it fixed right away     After the bulb check  the light will go out for 20 seconds   If the light comes back on after 20 seconds  the system  may be low on coolant  Sec  Engine Coolant  in the  Index        Ta                       H       Malfunction Indicator Lamp   Service Engine Soon     A computer monitors  operation of your fuel   ignition and emission  control systems  This light  should come on when the  ignition is on  but the  engine is not running  as a  check to show you it 15     working     SERVICE    ENGINE SOON       If 1t does not come on at all  have it fixed right away  If  it stays on  or it comes on while you are driving  the  computer is indicating that you have a problem  You  should take your vehicle in for service soon     NOTICE     If you keep driving your vehicle 
267. with this light on   after    while the emission controls won t work as    well  your fuel economy won t be as good and your  engine may not run as smoothly  This could lead to  costly repairs not covered by your warranty              Engine Oil Pressure Light    If you have a problem with  your oil  this light may stay  on after you start your  engine  or come on when  you are driving     This may indicate that oil is not going through your  engine quickly enough to keep it cool  The engine could  be low on oil  or could have some other oil problem     If you are driving  carefully pull over to a safe location  and stop to check the oil level  See  Checking Engine  Oil  in the Index    If the engine oil is low  add oil as required  See  Adding  Engine Oil  in the Index     2 57    If additional oil is not needed or the engine oil warning  light stays on  then have the light investigated at a  qualified service agent immediately     Doct Mees dapib b MR S d Ko If  you do  your engine can become so hot that it    The oil light could also come on in two other situations        When the ignition is on but the engine is not running  catches fire  You or others could be burned     the light will come on as a test to show you it is    working  but the light will go out when you turn the ise e aia      Pnb uni have your    ignition to START  If it doesn t come on with the  ignition on  vou may have a problem with the fuse or  bulb  Have it fixed right away            If you make a h
268. y     System  SIR     This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint   SIR   or air bag  system     Your Pontiac has two air bags    one air bag for the  driver and another air bag for the right front passenger     Here are the most important things to know about the air         system       AN CAUTION     You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if  you aren t wearing your safety belt    even if you  have an air bag  Wearing your safety belt during          crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things  inside the vehicle or being ejected from it  The air  Before you close the door  be sure the helt is out of the bag is only a  supplemental restraint   That is  it  way  If you slam the door on it  vou can damage both the works with safety belts but doesn t replace them     belt and your vehicle  CAUTION   Continued           146                                       3  r                 z    CAUTION   Continued   Air bags are designed to work only in moderate    to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle  hits something  They aren t designed to inflate at    all in rollover  rear  side  or low speed frontal  crashes  Everyone in your vehicle  including the  driver  should wear a safety belt properly        whether or not there s an air bag for that person     CAUTION     Air bags inflate with great force  faster than the  blink of an eye  If you re too close to an inflating  air bag  it could seriously injure you  Safety belis    help keep you in 
269. y Warnings and Symbols                         iji  Scheduled Maintenance Services          GU E  d      7 3  SER                    ee        ata nm wh Fo XE EE cel RC 1 2       T en od  nrc ea Me M          CUI E RO 1 1   Adjustable                 sued err nr 1 2                 dme  l i   Reclining PPO pania            er ECCE EY Y 1 3   Securing a Child Restraint                     1 33  seats and Restraml Systems    0 4 04    420 2046     del  Seats and Seat Controls           UA NIA  CE SRR   171         rro veras aa bhi ea sed bas            Onl  Security WES lie esci osha Walaa WE Wc e o 2 67  Security System  PASS Key                          2 10  SPRUCE                    e a rle e C ERN A wipe 6 1  service and Appearance 2  1         eu              ees        Service and Owner Publications                            8 7  Service Bulletins  Ordering aeree cs lee 8 7  Service Engine Soon Light                     td  Service Manuals  Ordering                            _ 8 7  Service Parts Identification Label                      6 45         Publications sss eroare reet hmmm 8 7  Service Work  Doing Your Own        6 1  Servicing Your Air Bag Equipped Pontiac               2   sheet Metal Damage  ierit eee re una 6 45  aiu Lever  Oro eg a4 eho ec el rrr hb               2 25  shift Lever  Steering Column oo    bee eren 2 24  SAAMA to Purk  P  eea nae p               2 24  Shifting Out of Park  P                             2 27  shifting  Automatic Transaxle   
270. ymbol        If you never look     your instrument panel  you may not  see something important  such as a warning light  So be   lt j sure to scan your displays and controls and the driving   CHECK GAGES environment just as you would in a vehicle without  HUD     NOTICE     Although the HUD image appears to he near the  front of the vehicle  do not use it as a parking aid                     The HUD was not designed for that purpose  If  you try to use it that way  such as in a parking     lot  you may misjudge distance and run into  something        HUD shows these images when they are lighted on the  instrument panel     When you sit straight in your seat  the HUD image will  appear slightly to the right    When the ignition key is turned to RUN  all possible  HUD images will come on  then the Head Up Display  will operate normally        n BA    HEAD UP DISPLAY     ADJUST    TE                 The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering  column     Start your engine and slide the HUD dimmer control  all the way up    The brightness of the HUD image is determined by  whether the headlamp switch 15 on or off  and where  you have set the HUD dimmer control    Adjust the seat  if necessary  before setting the height  control     Slide the ADJUST  image height  control all the way  up  raising the image as far as possible  Then slide    the HUD image height control down so the image is  as low as possible but in full view     1  Slide the dimmer control downward un
271. you slid under it  the  belt would apply force at your abdomen  This could  cause serious or even fatal injuries  The shoulder belt  should go over the shoulder and across the chest  These  parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining  forces     The safety belt locks if there s a sudden stop or a crash      N CAUTION     You can be seriously hurt if vour shoulder belt is    too loose  In a crash you would move forward too  much  which could increase injury  The shoulder  belt should fit against vour body        To unlatch the belt  just push the button on the buckle        1 26                      LA RI    Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for seatback and the interior body  about half way down the   Children and Small Adults edge of the seatback  Here is how you should install the  comfort guides on the shoulder belts    Kear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added          comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints     Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of   and for small adults  The comfort guides pull the the seatback and the interior body to remove the    shoulder belts away from the neck and head  guide from its storage clip        3  ir    Slide the guide under and past the belt  The elastic    There is one guide for each outside passenger position in oes  the rear seat  You will find them tucked in between the cord must be under the belt                1 27       3  There is a  button stop  on the shoulder belt that  keeps
272. your driving to the road conditions  See  Traction  Control System  in the Index    If you don t have the traction control system  accelerate  gently  Try not to break the fragile traction  If you  accelerate too fast  the drive wheels will spin and polish  the surface under the tires even more       4 25    Your anti lock brakes improve your ability to make a  hard stop on a slippery road  Even though you have the  anti lock braking system  you ll want to begin stopping  sooner than you would on dry pavement  See   Anti Lock  in the Index        Allow greater following distance      any slippery  road        Watch for slippery spots  The road might be fine  until you hit a spot that s covered with ice  On an  otherwise clear road  ice patches may appear in  shaded areas where the sun can t reach  around  clumps of trees  behind buildings  or under bridges   Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may  remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear  If  you see a patch of ice ahead of vou  brake before you  are on it  Try not to brake while you re actually on  the ice  and avoid sudden steering maneuvers     4 26    If You re Caught in a Blizzard       If you are stopped by heavy snow  you could be in     serious situation  You should probably stay with your  vehicle unless you know for sure thal you are near help  and you can hike through the snow  Here are some  things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your  passengers safe  Turn on your hazard flashers  T
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Manual técnico - E  Surface Pro User Guide - Italian  Autoline VX10 Roadmarking Controller System  Manual PDF    Istruzioni d`uso Bilance di precisione Excellence  MANUEL D`UTILISATION GENERALE  Manuale Utente - Melchiori Egidio  User manual  Aerocool XPredator X1    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file